JP2018047340A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance interest in a game by achieving a notice performance capable of attracting player's interest.SOLUTION: A mode of a holding notice performance to be executed is made different between control of a game state to a low-base state and control to a high-based state. More specifically, in a first special symbol holding notice performance executable in a low-base state (first game state), a first performance retention is displayed in a mode in which a display color is different from that of a normal display mode. Meanwhile, in a second special symbol holding notice performance executable in a high-based state (second game state), second performance retention is displayed in a mode in which a display color is different from that of a normal display mode and a predetermined image is included, and is allowed to include a display mode change (retention change) in performance retention in a variable holding display area.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 45

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and is particularly applicable to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  Conventionally, it is possible to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the identification information (for example, special symbol or effect symbol) is variably displayed and the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific display result. Amusement machines are widely known. In this type of gaming machine, the game entertainment is improved by performing various effects to increase the player's expectation during the variation display of the identification information. As such an effect, information regarding the fluctuation display of the identification information currently being executed or the fluctuation display of the identification information that is decided to be executed later (for example, the possibility that the display result will be a specific display result (reliability)) There is known a notice effect that gives a notice of the effect until the display result is derived (see, for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2).

JP 2003-164617 A JP 2009-95470 A

  However, the notice effect described above has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the aspect of the notice effect is uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to enhance the gaming interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to realize a notice effect capable of attracting the player's interest and to improve the gaming interest.

In order to solve the above-described problems, the present invention employs the following configuration.
That is, the gaming machine of the present invention is
A gaming machine that performs a variable display of identification information and can execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display being a specific display result,
Provided with a notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect related to the change display of the identification information,
The notice effect includes at least a first notice effect that can be executed when the game state when the variation display of the identification information is performed is the first game state, and when the game state is the second game state. The gist is that there is an executable second notice effect.

  According to the present invention as described above, it is possible to realize a notice effect capable of attracting the player's interest and to improve the gaming interest.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display device shown in FIG. 3, and is a view showing display devices provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the game machine. It is a table | surface which shows a response | compatibility etc. with the classification of winning and the opening pattern of a big prize opening. It is a table | surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a big hit type determination table, (C) is a normal symbol per determination table, and (D) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of an interruption process. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of starting entrance. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of the process during normal symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol confirmation process. It is a flowchart of a normal electric accessory process. It is a flowchart of special figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of special figure 2 determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 success / failure determination processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol confirmation process. It is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of a specific area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the number of reserved balls. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a hold notice setting process. It is a flowchart of a change production start process. It is a flowchart of a right-handed instruction | indication image display process. (A) is the special figure 1 reservation notice effect pattern determination table A, (b) is the special figure 1 reservation notice effect pattern determination table B, and (c) is the special figure 1 reservation notice effect pattern determination table C. . (A) is a special figure 2 reservation notice effect pattern determination table A, (b) is a special figure 2 reservation notice effect pattern determination table B, and (c) is a special figure 2 reservation notice effect pattern determination table C. (D) is the special figure 2 reservation notice effect pattern determination table D. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the normal display mode of the 1st production reservation, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 1 reservation notice effect based on the pattern A1 of the special figure 1 reservation notice type A, (C) is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 1 reservation notice effect based on the pattern B1 of the special figure 1 reservation notice type B, (d) is the special figure 1 reservation based on the pattern C5 of the special figure 1 reservation notice type C. It is a figure which shows an example of a notice effect. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the normal display mode of 2nd effect reservation, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 2 reservation notice effect based on the pattern A1 of the special figure 2 reservation notice type A, (C) is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 2 reservation notice effect based on the pattern B1 of the special figure 2 reservation notice type B, (d) is the special figure 2 reservation based on the pattern C5 of the special figure 2 reservation notice kind C. It is a figure which shows an example of a notice effect, (e) is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 2 reservation notice effect based on the pattern D4 of the special figure 2 reservation notice type D. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during the round production in a special game state, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during the fluctuation display of the production symbol in a high base state, (c) FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when a transition is made from a high base state to a low base state. (A) is a table | surface which shows the notice display mode of the 2nd effect reservation concerning the special figure 2 reservation notice type E of Example 2, (b) is the special figure 2 reservation notice effect pattern determination table E of Example 2. is there. 10 is a flowchart of a hold notice process when passing V according to the second embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen at the time of the jackpot decision in the high base state of Example 2, (b) is an example of the display screen before the holding notice effect at the time of passing V of Example 2 is performed. (C) is a figure which shows an example of a display screen when the holding notice effect at the time of passing V of Example 2 is performed. 12 is a flowchart of right-handed instruction image change processing (during a high base state) according to the third embodiment. It is a flowchart of the right-handed instruction | indication image change process (during a big hit game) of Example 4.

  Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following embodiments, a game medium used for a game is a game ball, and a pachinko game machine (bullet ball game machine) capable of proceeding with a game by launching the game ball toward a game board surface, What applied the invention is described. Specifically, a special symbol is displayed on the basis of the game ball entering the starting port (also referred to as “starting ball”), and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the end of the special symbol variation display. Then, a so-called “one type” pachinko gaming machine that can execute a big hit game (special game) in which a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) can be given to the player will be described.

  In the following description, the front side (front) simply refers to the front side when the gaming machine is viewed from the front (the side where the player is located during the game), and the rear side (rear) simply refers to the game This is the back side when the machine is viewed from the front. Also, the upper side (upper), lower side (lower), left side (left side), and right side (right side) are the directions of up, down, left, and right when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. For example, the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment (first embodiment) includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 attached in the gaming machine frame 50. The board 2 is configured to be detachable from the gaming machine frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the gaming board 2 is removed from the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 to which the gaming board 2 and the like are attached, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the island facility of the hall. The front frame 51, the main body frame 52, and the outer frame 53 are pivotally supported on one side end side and can be opened and closed.

  In addition, the front frame 51 can supply a launching handle 60 for launching a game ball with a launch intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player and a game ball stored and stored to the launching device side. A ball hitting tray (upper pan) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower pan) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball hitting tray 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (generally referring to these two effect buttons) that can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. Simply referred to as “effect button 63”), a decorative frame lamp 66 that can emit various lights according to the game situation, and various sounds (sound effects) according to the game situation. The speaker 67 etc. which can be provided are also provided.

  The effect button 63 functions as an input means that can be input by the player, and the effect button to be used can be selected depending on the type of game effect. For example, when the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b is operated during the execution of the game effect, a predetermined operation-corresponding effect is performed based on the operation. Note that the configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the aspect of the present embodiment, and it is sufficient that the player can input, for example, an input means (for example, an input means in which the player directly makes contact with the button portion) For example, it may be a haunting type, a touch sensor type, etc.) or a non-contact type input means (photoelectric type etc.) that detects and inputs that part of the player's body is close Good. The effect button may be one that performs an effect operation such as projecting upward or near side or vibrating (movable effect operation means).

  In the game board 2, a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down is surrounded by the rail member 4. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding a game ball are projected, and a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4. The ball return prevention piece 6 is for preventing the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side. The game board 2 is also provided with a decorative board surface lamp 5 (see FIG. 5) that can emit various lights according to the game situation.

  Near the center of the game area 3, an image display device 7 which is an aspect of the effect display means is provided. The image display device 7 of the present embodiment is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and an effect symbol display area 7b in which effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as “effect symbol 8”) are displayed on the display screen 7a. (Also referred to as “effect design display section”) and a background display area 7c in which a background image constituting the background of the display screen 7a is displayed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R perform a variable display in synchronization with a variable display of a first special symbol and a variable display of a second special symbol, which will be described later. As a mode of the variable display, for example, there is a mode in which scroll display is performed in the up / down, left / right, and diagonal directions. In this embodiment, in principle, scroll display (vertical scroll) is performed in the vertical direction. The effect symbol display area 7b includes, for example, three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The left symbol display area displays the left effect symbol 8L, and the middle symbol display area displays the medium effect. The symbol 8C is displayed, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. The positions of the left, middle, and right symbol display areas do not need to be separately provided, and the display areas of the left, middle, and right effect symbols may be the entire symbol display area (effect symbol display area 7b). .

  The production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (identification information) of the present embodiment are composed of numeric symbols (identification information type, symbol type) from “1” to “9”, respectively, and these numeric symbols are displayed in order. Has become. Specifically, for the variation display of the production symbol 8, the production symbols are scrolled in the vertical direction (from top to bottom) in the order of “1” → “2”... “8” → “9” (ascending order). When it reaches “9”, it returns to “1” and repeats the scroll display until the end of change (stop display). In this embodiment, color information is included in each of the symbols “1” to “9”, and each symbol can be classified by color. Specifically, odd symbols “3” and “7” are red symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “red symbols”), and other odd symbols “1”, “5”, “9” "Is a green symbol (hereinafter also referred to as" green symbol "). The even symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are blue symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “blue symbols”).

  Displayed on a first special symbol display 41a (also referred to as “first special symbol display unit”) to be described later by a combination (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b. The result of the variable display of the first special symbol to be displayed and the result of the variable display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as “second special symbol display unit”), that is, the special symbol The result of the determination of success / failure (also simply referred to as “correction determination”) is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. In the present embodiment, the order in which the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are variably displayed are stopped and displayed (stop order) is basically “left → right → middle”. That is, the stop symbol with the first stop order is the left effect symbol 8L, the stop symbol with the second stop order is the right effect symbol 8R, and the stop symbol with the third stop order (the last) is the middle effect symbol 8C. . The first stop symbol in the stop order is also called the “first stop symbol”, the second stop symbol in the stop order is also called the “second stop symbol”, and the stop order is the third stop symbol. This is also referred to as “third stop symbol” or “final stop symbol”.

  Further, it refers to any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the production symbol, and is also simply referred to as “symbol” or “identification information”. Furthermore, “normal figure” or “ordinary identification information” for the normal symbol, “special” for the special symbol, “special symbol 1”, “first special”, or “second” for the first special symbol. The special symbol is also referred to as “special diagram 2” or “second special diagram”. Further, the image display device 7 for displaying the effect symbol 8, the first special symbol display 41a to be described later for displaying the first special symbol, and the second special symbol indicator 41b for displaying the second special symbol are referred to as "identification information". Also referred to as “display means”.

  For example, if the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit, the effect symbol can be stopped and displayed with the same third digit such as “777” (also referred to as “hit effect symbol”). In addition, in the case of a small hit, it is possible to stop and display the effect symbol with a preset chance symbol such as “135” or a special symbol such as “3 * 3” (also referred to as “small hit effect symbol”) It is. In addition, when it comes off, it is possible to stop and display the effect design with a rosette design (also referred to as “outage effect design”) in which at least one of the three designs such as “637” and “373” is different. Is possible. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed. That is, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol success / failure determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, Grasp the effect symbols displayed in the symbol display area 7b.

  Here, among the stop display modes (design combinations) of the effect symbols, the stop display mode (in the present embodiment, the doublet in this example) corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit is “big hit mode”, “specific "Aspect" or "specific display result", and a stop display mode (in this example, a non-specific mode) corresponding to a case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is out of place is referred to as "" outside mode "or" non-specific mode " Or “non-specific display result”. In addition, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is successful is sometimes referred to as “small hit mode”, “predetermined mode”, or “predetermined display result”. Moreover, since the stop display mode of the effect symbol 8 can be said to indicate the result of the variable display of the effect symbol 8, it refers to the entire stop display mode of the effect symbol 8 and is referred to as “result display mode”. is there.

  On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the above-described game effect using the effect symbol (effect symbol game effect), a per game effect (special game effect) executed in conjunction with the hit game, Other game effects such as a demonstration effect for waiting for customers are displayed. In the effect symbol game effect, the hit game effect, and the demonstration effect, various effect images other than effect symbols such as background images and character images are displayed in addition to effect symbols such as numbers. The effect symbol game effect is also referred to as “variable effect”.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying a first effect hold 9a in accordance with the number of first special figure hold to be described later. There is provided a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) for displaying the second effect hold 9b in accordance with the number of second special figure hold to be described later (see FIG. 3). Depending on the display mode (the number of displays in this example) of the first effect hold (also referred to as “first hold symbol”) and the second effect hold (also referred to as “second hold symbol”), the first special figure hold indicator described later. The stored number of the first special figure hold displayed at 43a and the stored number of the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b can be easily shown to the player. Here, with respect to the vertical position relationship between the first effect hold display area 9c and the second effect hold display area 9d, in this embodiment, the position is changed up and down in accordance with the gaming state. Specifically, when the gaming state is in a low base state, which will be described later, as shown in FIG. 3, the first effect hold display area 9c is positioned above the second effect hold display area 9d, and the game state is described later. When in the high base state, the upper and lower arrangements are reversed, and the second effect hold display area 9d is positioned above the first effect hold display area 9c. This is because, in the low base state, the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, and in the high base state, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly performed. Corresponding to this, the variable display is mainly performed. It is configured to display an effect hold according to the type of special symbol.

  Furthermore, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 of the present embodiment, there is a production suspension corresponding to the currently changing special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), that is, the digested special symbol suspension. A variable hold display area 9e for displaying a corresponding effect hold (first effect hold 9a or second effect hold 9b) is provided (see FIG. 3). In the variation hold display area 9e, with the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the production suspension corresponding to the variation display (the first production suspension 9a or the second production suspension 9b) has been displayed until then. It moves from the area (first effect hold display area 9c or second effect hold display area 9d), and after the move, the effect hold is displayed in the variable hold display area 9e until a predetermined display end condition is satisfied. Is done. In the present embodiment, the super reach effect described later is started on the display screen 7a, or the change display is terminated without performing the reach effect described later on the display screen 7a (without reaching reach), and the off effect is achieved. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect hold displayed (moved) in the variable hold display area 9e is deleted. It should be noted that the display termination condition for effect suspension in the variable suspension display area 9e is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined.

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left-handed display area 70c (left-handed instruction image display unit) for displaying a left-handed instruction image 70 described later and a right-handed instruction described later are displayed according to the gaming state. A right-handed display area 71c (right-handed instruction image display unit) for displaying the image 71 is provided (see FIG. 52). The left-handed instruction image 70 and the right-handed instruction image 71 are also collectively referred to as “fired instruction images”.

  Near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7, a center decorative body 10 surrounding the display screen 7a (effect symbol display area 7b) is provided. The center decoration body 10 is configured by a plastic (resin) molding, and is attached to the surface (front surface) of the game board 2 as a frame-like part (board part) having an open center. . The display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 can be visually recognized through the central opening of the center decorative body 10.

  A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which a game ball can roll is provided at a lower portion of the center decorative body 10, and a hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decorative body 10. It has been. The warp unit 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit. A game ball flowing down the game area 3 (left game area 3A) is received from the warp entrance, and the game ball is discharged from the warp exit to be the stage unit 11. Guide to. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage unit 11 can enter the first start port 20 described later with a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage unit 11. In addition, a decorative member 13 that is shaped like a character or a figure is disposed on the center decorative body 10. The decoration member 13 is provided with an electric decoration member such as an LED, and can be turned on or blinked in accordance with the game state or the game effect.

  In addition, a movable decorative member 14 that can be operated in accordance with a game effect is provided above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13. As shown in FIG. 3, the movable decorative member 14 is usually hidden behind a frame (in this example, the decorative member 13) constituting the center decorative body 10, and cannot be visually recognized as a whole. The movable decorative member 14 falls down and appears on the front side of the display screen 7a with the execution of the game effect having a high probability of hitting, so that the movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a. Most of them are visible. As a result, the player increases the sense of expectation for winning (big hit).

  Here, the production hold 9a, 9b corresponding to the special figure hold is also referred to as “memory display”, and the production hold display areas 9c, 9d (production hold display section) capable of displaying the production hold 9a, 9b. This is also referred to as “production hold display means” or “memory display means”, and the image display device 7 capable of performing display effects by displaying various effect images according to the game situation is referred to as “display effect means”. The movable decorative member 14 capable of performing a movable effect by operating along with a game effect is also referred to as a “movable effect means”. In addition to the movable decorative member 14, for example, when the effect button 63 moves up and down or vibrates with the game effect, the effect button 63 can also be said to be “movable effect means”. In addition, the speaker 67 that can produce a sound by producing various sounds (sound effects) according to the game situation is also called “sound production means”, and emits various lights according to the game situation. The panel lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, and the decorative member 13 that can produce a light effect by emitting light are also referred to as "light effect means". In addition to these panel lamps 5 and the like, for example, the effect button 63 and the launch handle 60 have built-in electric decoration members such as LEDs as well as the decoration member 13, and the operation of the electric decoration members makes it possible to play a game. In the case of lighting / flashing in response, the effect button 63 and the launch handle 60 can also be said to be “light effect means”. Further, these “effect hold display means”, “display effect means”, “movable effect means”, “sound effect means”, and “light effect means” are also collectively referred to as “effect means”.

  Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first start port 20 that does not change the ease of entering a game ball is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20, and if a predetermined condition is established, whether or not the first special symbol is true (first special symbol true / false) When the determination) is executed, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the determination result.

  Below the first start opening 20, there is provided a variable winning device 22 (also referred to as "variable start opening") having a variable second start opening 21 for changing the ease of entering a game ball. . A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and if a predetermined condition is established, whether or not the second special symbol is determined (second special symbol determination) ) Is executed, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the determination result.

  Note that the special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display based on the result of the special symbol success / failure determination result being “big hit” is also called “big hit variation” or “specific variation”. The special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display performed based on the result of “small hit” is also called “small hit variation” or “predetermined variation”, and the special symbol success / failure determination result is “ The special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display performed based on the fact that it is “out” is also referred to as “out-of-range variation” or “non-specific variation”.

  The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second start port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first mode. is there. That is, the movable member 23 changes the possibility of entering a game ball into the second start port 21 by performing a predetermined operation (opening / closing operation). The movable member 23 is driven by a second start port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In the present embodiment, the second starting port 21 can enter the game ball only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and the game ball cannot enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. . The second starting port 21 is completely open when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the open state. It may not be impossible to enter the ball.

  On the right side of the first start opening 20 in the game area 3, there is provided a first big winning device 31 having a first big winning opening 30 (also referred to as a “first variable winning opening”). The first grand prize winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and opens / closes the first grand prize winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening / closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first big prize opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). The first grand prize opening 30 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. In other words, the first grand prize winning device 31 has an opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32 to make it impossible to enter a game ball (closed state) and allow a game ball to enter (open state). Can be changed.

  Further, in the game area 3, a second large winning opening 35 (also referred to as a “second variable pitching opening”) is provided above the first large winning opening 30 and in the lower right portion of the center decorative body 10. A big winning device 36 is provided. The second grand prize winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member (blade member) 37, and opens and closes the second big prize winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second big prize opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5). The second big winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. In other words, the second grand prize winning device 36 has an opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 37 to make it impossible to enter a game ball (closed state) and to enter a possible game ball (open state). Can be changed.

  The second grand prize winning device 36 is formed with a specific area 39 through which a game ball that has entered the second big prize winning opening 35 can pass. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a high probability state described later is generated based on the detection that at least one of the game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening 35 has passed the specific area 39. . That is, the specific area 39 is a probability changing operation port. Such a specific area 39 is not provided in the first big prize winning device 31. The second big prize opening 35 (second big prize device 36) provided with such a specific area 39 (V area) as a probability changing operation port is also referred to as a “V attacker”. Note that the high probability state is one of the gaming benefits provided to the player separately from the special game.

  A gate 28 (game ball passage opening) through which a game ball can pass is provided in a region on the right side of the center decorative body 10 (right game region 3B) in the game region 3. Based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is obtained is obtained. When a predetermined condition is established, it is determined whether or not the second start port 21 is opened. When the symbol success / failure determination is executed, the normal symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination. When the winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the second start port 21 is opened. Further, a plurality of general winning ports 27 are provided at the lower part of the game area 3. In the present embodiment, four general winning ports 27 are provided, three of which are left general winning ports provided on the left side of the first start port 20, and one is the right of the first big winning port 30. It is a right general prize opening provided for the person. The first start opening 20, the second start opening 21, the first grand prize opening 30, the second big prize opening 35, and the general prize opening 27 are entry holes that serve as a chance to pay out prize balls, respectively. When a game ball enters the mouth, a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) are paid out at each entrance. Specifically, the number of winning balls at the first starting port 20 is “4”, the number of winning balls at the second starting port 21 is “2”, and the number of winning balls at the first big winning port 20 and the second big winning port 35. Is “15”, and the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 27 is “10”.

  A game in which a plurality of entrances (the first start opening 20, the second start opening 21, the first big prize opening 30, the second big prize opening 35, the general prize opening 27 and the gate 28) are arranged in this way. The area 3 can be divided into a left game area 3A (first area) on the left side from the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B (second area) on the right side. Launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called “left-handed”, and firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called “right-handed”. . Here, among the plurality of entrances, the first start opening 20 and the three left general winning entrances 27 are provided so that game balls flowing down the left game area 3A among the game areas 3 can enter. The second starting port 21, the first grand prize opening 30, the second major prize opening 35, the right general prize opening 27 and the gate 28 enter the game balls flowing down the right game area 3 </ b> B of the game areas 3. It is provided as possible. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, at the start of the game, in principle, aiming to enter the first starting port 20 by left-handed. On the other hand, when the winning / unjudging decision based on the entry to the first starting port 20 is a win and the gaming state changes, in principle, the gate 28, the second starting port 21, the first big winning port 30 and the The goal is to enter the two big winning holes 35.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is disposed at the lower right portion of the game board 2. The main display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) that displays the first special symbol in a variably displayed and stopped state, and a second special symbol that displays the second special symbol in a variably displayed and stopped state. A display 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display unit 42 (normal symbol display unit) that displays normal symbols in a variable manner and stops display are included. In addition, the main indicator 40 includes a first special figure hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored determination information (first special figure hold) related to the first special symbol, and the determination information related to the second special symbol. A second special figure hold indicator 43b for displaying the stored number of (second special figure hold), a general figure hold indicator 44 for displaying the stored number of operation hold (common figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42, It is included. Further, the main display 40 includes a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination or the second special symbol success / failure determination has been won, and the first special symbol success / failure determination or the second special symbol success / failure. A round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed when the result of the determination is a jackpot, a game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and a firing direction of the game ball, that is, right A firing direction indicator 47 that indicates whether a strike should be made (for example, a high base state described later) or a left strike (for example, a low base state described later) is included. These various displays included in the main display 40 are display-controlled by a main control unit described later.

  The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the game ball entering the first start port 20 (also referred to as “first start ball”). The variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the game ball entering the second start port 21 (also referred to as “second start start ball”). In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as “special symbols”. The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as “special symbol display unit 41”. In addition, the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b may be collectively referred to as a “special figure hold display unit 43”.

  In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and then stopped and displayed. The special symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. The result of lottery based on (special symbol success / failure determination, big hit lottery) is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols based on the special symbol success / failure determination. When the stop symbol is a predetermined jackpot symbol (special special symbol, specific identification information), that is, the special symbol stop display mode (special symbol variation display result) is a big hit symbol or small hit symbol etc. In the case of the mode, a special game (a big hit game or a small hit game) is performed in which the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the winning symbol displayed in a stopped state. Is called. In addition, the opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  The special symbol stop display is performed until a predetermined stop display time (determined display time) elapses. Then, if the special symbol that has been displayed in a stopped state is an out-of-order symbol (out-of-phase, non-specific mode) and the special symbol hold is stored at the time of the stop display, when the stop display time has elapsed, The oldest (earliest) special figure hold is digested, and thereby the next special symbol change display is started. In addition, if the special symbol that has been stopped is out of place and the special symbol hold is not stored at the time of the stop display, the special symbol's stop display state is maintained even after the stop display time has elapsed. Is done. On the other hand, if the special symbol that has been stopped is a winning symbol, when the stop display time elapses, the process proceeds to an opening period that will be described later, and after the opening period, the first big winning opening in the winning game is released (for example, If it is a big hit game, the first round) is started. Note that the special symbol stop display time is generally "0.5 seconds to 1.0 seconds", and is set to "0.6 seconds" in this embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41 a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by “ip” and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination. In this embodiment, as a result of the first special symbol success / failure determination, four types of big hits of “15R first big hit”, “15R second big hit”, “5R third big hit” and “2R fourth big hit”, Small hits are provided (see FIGS. 6 and 8), and the LEDs of the first special symbol display 41a can take display modes corresponding to the big hits and the small hits. For example, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is the first big hit (15R big hit), the three “ijn” LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R first big hit symbol). When the second big hit (15R big hit) is reached, the three “ijk” LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R second big hit symbol). Further, when the third big hit (15R big hit) is reached, the three “ijl” LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R third big hit symbol). Also, when the fourth big hit (2R big hit) is reached, the four “jnop” LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off (2R fourth big hit symbol). Further, when the first small hit is reached, the four “mnop” LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off (first small hit symbol). In addition, when it comes off, the two “lo” LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off (outage symbol).

  On the other hand, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by “a to h”, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination. In this embodiment, two types of big hits, “15R fifth big hit” and “15R sixth big hit”, and second small hit are provided as a result of the second special symbol success / failure determination (see FIGS. 6 and 8). The LED of the second special symbol display 41b can take a display mode corresponding to each of the big hits and the small hits. For example, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is the fifth big hit (15R big hit), the three “abd” LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R fifth big hit symbol). When the sixth big hit (15R big hit) is reached, the three LEDs “abc” are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R sixth big hit symbol). Further, when the second small hit is reached, the four “cdeh” LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off (second small hit symbol). In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs “eh” are turned on and the rest are turned off (out of symbol).

  The special symbol stop display mode (stop symbol) and jackpot type (number of rounds, jackpot number, etc.) are not limited to these and can be arbitrarily set. Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol variation display is performed over a predetermined variation time. The variation display mode is, for example, that light repeatedly flows from left to right in a predetermined order. In this manner, each LED can be turned on.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various information such as a special symbol success / failure random number (“acquired information”) The acquired various information is temporarily stored in a special figure storage unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit. Specifically, if the ball enters the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure storage unit (not shown) as the first special figure reservation (first acquisition information), and then to the second starting port 21. Is stored in a second special figure storage unit (not shown) as second special figure reservation (second acquisition information). The number of special figure reservations (acquired information) that can be stored in each special figure storage unit is limited to a predetermined number, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is “4”. The first special figure storage unit and the second special figure storage unit are also referred to as “first acquisition information storage unit” and “second acquisition information storage unit”, respectively, and are also collectively referred to as “acquisition information storage unit”.

  The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit is digested when the special symbol based on the special figure hold can be displayed. The digestion of the special symbol hold means that the special symbol determination random number or the like corresponding to the special symbol hold is determined, and the special symbol variable display for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the change display of the special symbol based on the entrance of the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the entrance, that is, the change of the special symbol Even when the display is being executed or the special game is being executed, it is possible to reserve the right to determine whether or not the special symbol is appropriate for the entry, up to a predetermined number (“4” in this embodiment). It has become.

  The number of special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two “uv” LEDs, and the first special figure is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold. The number of holds is displayed. For example, when the number of holds is “0”, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as “u □ v □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit). When “1” is “1”, the display mode is such that “u” LED is turned off and “v” LED is lit in red, such as “u □ v ●”. “u” LED is turned on in red, and “v” LED is turned off. When the number of hold is “3”, both LEDs are turned on as “u ● v ●”. The display mode is lit in red, and when the number of reservations is “4 (upper limit number)”, both LEDs can be lit in green as “u ▲ v ▲”.

  The second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs “wx”, and the number of second special figure hold is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figure hold. Is displayed. For example, when the number of holds is “0”, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as “w □ x □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit). “1” to “4” are also determined in the same manner as the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

  The normal symbol variation display is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. In the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and then the stop symbol is displayed. The result of the normal symbol success / failure determination based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 is displayed based on the stopped normal symbol (stop symbol). Inform. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols based on the normal symbol determination. If the stopped normal symbol is a predetermined specific symbol (a normal symbol), an auxiliary game is performed in which the second start port 21 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the current gaming state. The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two “st” LEDs, and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination according to the lighting mode. It is. For example, if the determination result is a win, the normal symbol that is turned on when both LEDs are lit is stopped and displayed, such as “s t” (for example, ■: lighted, □: lighted off). If the determination result is out of place, an out-of-order normal symbol is displayed in a state where only the “t” LED is lit, such as “s □ t ■”. Note that the off-normal symbol is not a specific normal symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol variation display is executed for a predetermined variation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off. is there.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes to the gate 28, various information (also referred to as "acquired information") such as a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is obtained based on the passage, and the acquired various information Is temporarily stored as a general map reservation in a general map storage unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit. The number of general map holds that can be stored in the general map storage unit is limited to a predetermined number, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is “4”. The general map reservation stored in the general map storage unit is digested when the change display of the normal symbol based on the general map storage becomes possible. The digestion of the general symbol hold means that the normal symbol validity determination random number corresponding to the general symbol hold is determined, and the normal symbol variation display for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be immediately executed, that is, the variation display of the normal symbol is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. Even in such a case, it is possible to reserve the right to determine whether or not a normal symbol is appropriate for the passage with a predetermined number (“4” in this embodiment) as an upper limit.

  The number of the general map reservation stored in the general map storage unit is displayed on the general map storage display 44. Specifically, the general map hold indicator 44 is composed of two “qr” LEDs, and displays the number of general map holds by turning on the LED according to the number of general map holds. is there. For example, when the number of holdings is “0”, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as “q □ r □” (for example, □: off, ●: red on, ▲: green on). When “1” is “1”, a display mode in which the “q” LED is turned off and the “r” LED is turned on in red, such as “q □ r ●”. Further, the number of holdings “2” to “4” is determined in the same manner as the first special figure holding display 43a.

  Next, based on FIG.2 and FIG.5, the electrical structure in this pachinko game machine 1 is demonstrated. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a main control board 80 (also referred to as “main control unit”) that performs control related to game progress and game profits, such as special symbol success / failure determination, normal symbol success / failure determination, and game state transition. Sub-control board 90 (also referred to as “sub-control unit” or “effect control unit”) for performing control related to effects executed as the game progresses, payout control for performing control related to game ball payout Image control board for performing display control of the substrate 110 (also referred to as “payout control unit”), the image display device 7, the effect display 102, the effect first special figure hold display 103a, the effect second special figure hold display 103b, etc. 100 (image control unit) and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case storing the main control board 80 is provided at a substantially central portion on the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case. Is provided with an image control board storage case containing the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107 and the image control board 100, and a sub control board storage containing the sub control board 90 on the image control board storage case. A case is provided. Further, a payout control board case for storing the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for storing the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

  A game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from other boards via an input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. The ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure storage unit (first special figure storage unit and second special figure storage unit) and the general figure storage unit. In addition, storage areas for use in various flags and various counters are secured at predetermined addresses in the RAM (main control RAM) of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81).

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first start opening sensor 20a, a second start opening sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first big prize opening sensor 30a, a second big prize opening sensor 35a, a specific area sensor 39a, and a non-specification. An area sensor 49a and a general winning opening sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as “game ball detecting means”.

  The first start port sensor 20 a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21 a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28 a is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first grand prize opening sensor 30 a is provided in the first big prize opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first big prize opening 30. The second big prize opening sensor 35a is provided in the second big prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 35. The specific area sensor 39 a is provided in the specific area 39 in the second grand prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39. The non-specific area sensor 49a is provided in a non-specific area (not shown) in the second big prize opening 35, and a game that has passed through the non-specific area among the game balls that have entered the second big prize opening 35. A ball (that is, a game ball that has not passed through the specific area 39) is detected. The general winning opening sensor 27 a is provided in each of the general winning openings 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 27.

  In addition, as the solenoids, a second start opening solenoid 24, a first large winning opening solenoid 33, and a second large winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second start port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31. The second big prize winning solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36.

  Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special diagram hold indicator 43a, a second special figure hold indicator 43b, A figure hold display 44, a round display 45, a game status display 46, a firing direction display 47, and a hit display 48 are connected. That is, display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. On the payout control board 110, a payout device 120 for paying out a prize ball or a rental ball, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and stored in an inserted prepaid card (game value storage medium) or the like are stored. And a launching device 112 are connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as “launch control unit”). The firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

  The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls payout of game balls in accordance with a predetermined program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 drives the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Then, award balls are paid out or lending balls are paid out. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 of the launch device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the launch handle 60, and the launch volume 115 detects the amount of rotation of the launch handle 60. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115. In this embodiment, the number of game balls that can be continuously fired by the launching device 112 by driving the launch motor 113 is about 100 per minute.

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 (“effect control microcomputer”) that controls the effect (game effect) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a predetermined program. Yes. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. . The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 91, and the ROM may be externally attached. In addition, storage areas for use in various flags and various count counters are secured at predetermined addresses in the RAM (production control RAM) of the sub-control board 90 (production control microcomputer 91).

  The sub control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Here, the sub control board 90 (sub control part), the image control board 100 (image control part), the sound control board 106 (sound control part), and the lamp control board 107 (lamp control part) depend on the game situation. It functions as an effect execution means that causes various effects such as a display effect, a sound effect, and a lamp effect (light effect) to be executed by a corresponding effect device or member (effect device). For example, it also functions as a notice effect execution means for executing various notice effects such as a hold notice and a step-up notice. In addition, the notice effect refers to the possibility of a big hit (hit reliability), the execution mode of the change display (fluctuation effect pattern), etc. This refers to the performance to be notified (suggested).

  The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 displays an image on the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The display control of the device 7, the effect display 102, the effect first special figure hold display 103a, and the effect second hold display 103b is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, and the like (including effect symbols, hold symbols, etc.) And image data such as background images. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

  The effect indicator 102 is composed of two LEDs, and performs a change display and a stop display in accordance with the change display and stop display of the effect symbol 8, and the effect symbol 8 is turned on / off or a combination of colors. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the display result (result of special symbol success / failure determination). Similarly, the production first special figure hold display 103a and the production second hold display 103b are also composed of two LEDs. Then, by the lighting / extinction of two LEDs or a combination of colors, the production first special figure hold display 103a is displayed on the first special figure hold display area 43 and the number of hold displayed in the first production hold display area 9c. The display is controlled in a display mode that indicates the same number of held as the number of held. In addition, the production second special figure hold display 103b is displayed in a display form showing the number of hold displayed in the second production hold display area 9d and the number of hold displayed in the second special figure hold display 43b. Be controlled. This is because the character design is displayed on substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect design display portion), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated to display the effect design display area 7b (effect design display portion) of the display screen 7a. By covering, some or all of the various images displayed on the display screen 7a, such as the effect design 8, the first effect hold 9a, the second effect hold 9b, etc. may become invisible. Various indicators are provided. A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the image control microcomputer 101 may execute sound control. In this case, acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91, based on the command received from the main control board 80, emits light pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinction, emission color, etc.) for determining the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. , Lamp data) is determined from data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. As described above, the movable decorative member 14 is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the center decorative body 10 (behind the decorative member 13). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “driving data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined operation pattern data. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107. In this case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

  The sub-control board 90 includes a first effect button detection switch 63c that detects that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.) and A second effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal from the corresponding effect button detection switch is input to the sub-control board 90. The first effect button detection switch 63c and the second effect button detection switch 63d are collectively referred to simply as “effect button detection switch”.

  Next, the control (determination means) related to the determination as to whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment is correct will be described. In the present embodiment, there are “big hit”, “small hit”, and “off” as the result of the special symbol success / failure determination. When the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is “big hit”, “big hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41, and when “small hit”, “small hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. , “Exclusion” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. When it is determined that the game is a big win or a small win, a “special game” is executed to open the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed. . A special game executed as a big hit is also called a “big hit game”, and a special game executed as a small hit is also called a “small hit game”.

  There are several types of hits. As shown in FIG. 6, the types of jackpots include “15R (round) first jackpot”, “15R second jackpot”, “15R third jackpot”, “2R fourth jackpot”, “15R fifth jackpot” and There is “15R 6th big hit”. “15R 1st big hit” and “15R 5th big win” have 15 open times (number of rounds) of the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30 or second big prize opening 35). In the second round, it is a big hit that opens the second big prize opening 35 (V attacker) in such a manner that the game ball can pass (V pass) to the specific area 39 (easy). A round aimed at passing the game ball to the specific area 39 is also referred to as a “V round” or a “chance round”. The “V round” and “chance round” are also referred to as “privilege determination game”.

  “15R 2nd big hit”, “15R 3rd big hit”, and “15R 6th big hit” have 15 opening times (number of rounds) of the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30 or second big prize opening 35). However, it is difficult to pass the game ball to the specific area 39 (it may be impossible) with the opening times of the first and second rounds, which are the V rounds described above, being extremely short (opening and closing for a moment). It is. That is, it can be said that these big hits are big hits that do not open the second big winning opening 35 (V attacker) in a manner that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 (easy).

  “2R 4th big hit” is a mode in which the number of times of opening the grand prize opening (number of rounds) is 2, and the game ball can pass to the specific area 39 in the first and second rounds of the V round. It is a big hit that opens the second big prize opening 35 (V attacker). However, since the opening time of the second grand prize opening 35 is 1.8 seconds even if the first round and the second round are combined, the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is lower than the 15R first big hit. It has become.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, based on the passing of the game ball to the specific area 39 in the big hit game, the game state after the end of the big hit game is shifted to a high probability state described later. Therefore, if the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is 15R first big hit or 15R fifth big hit, the V of the first round and the second round in a manner that the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39 is extremely high. Since the round is executed, the game state after the big hit game can be shifted to the high probability state by passing the game ball to the specific area 39 during the execution of the big hit game. Also, when the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is 2R fourth big hit, it is not as much as 15R first big hit or 15R fifth big hit, but in a mode in which the game ball may pass to the specific area 39. Since the round V and the second round V are executed, if the game ball can be passed to the specific area 39 during execution of the big hit game, the game state after the big hit game can be shifted to a high probability state. it can.

  On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is 15R second big hit, 15R third big hit or 15R sixth big hit, the opening times of the first and second rounds of V rounds are 0. Since it is 1 second, it is very difficult to enter the game ball into the second grand prize opening, and the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39 during execution of the big hit game is extremely low (substantially) Impossible). For this reason, the gaming state after the big hit game is very likely to be a normal state (low probability state) described later (it may be said that it becomes a low probability state).

  On the other hand, the small winning (first small winning, second small winning) is a hit to open the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) with the same opening pattern as the 2R fourth big winning. That is, in the small hit, the second big prize opening 35 is opened in such a manner that the game ball can pass to the specific area 39. However, even if a game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the small hit game, the game state after the small hit game is not changed from before the small hit game is executed. Therefore, if the gaming state before the small hit game is executed in the normal state (low probability state), the gaming state after the small hit game is also in the normal state. From the viewpoint of the player, the 2R fourth big hit and the small hit cannot be distinguished from each other even by looking at the opening pattern of the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35). That is, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is “2R fourth big hit” or “small hit”. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the special game as 2R 4th big hit (during the big hit game), it is only to recognize whether or not the subsequent game state has shifted to the high probability state. Have difficulty. In addition, even if a game ball passes through the specific area 39 during a special game as a small hit (during a small hit game), whether or not the subsequent game state remains in a normal state or has shifted to a high probability state. It is difficult to recognize. As a result, in the case of a small hit and a 2R fourth big hit, the game can be advanced with a sense of expectation that it may be in a high probability state, and the gaming interest can be enhanced. . Incidentally, in the small hit, the number of times of opening the big prize opening is not called the number of rounds, but simply called the number of times of opening.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening when each big hit and small hit is as shown in FIG. That is, when 15R first big hit (when the 15R first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a) and 15R fifth big hit (when the second special symbol display 41b is 15R) When the 5th big hit symbol is stopped), the 2nd big prize opening 35 (V attacker) is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds for 1R to 2R, and the 1st big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds for 3R to 15R. Let In this big hit, since the opening time of the second grand prize winning opening 35 at the 1R and 2R is 28 seconds respectively, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the round (V round) is extremely high. It has become.

  Also, when the 15R second big hit (when the 15R second big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a) and when the 15R third big hit (when the first special symbol display 41a is displayed) When the 15R third big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the 15R sixth big hit symbol is reached (when the 15R sixth big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b), 1R to 2R The second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds, and the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds for 3R to 15R. In this big hit, the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 (V attacker) at the 1R and 2R is set to be extremely short time of 0.1 seconds at maximum (opening and closing for a moment), so during the round (during V round) ) It is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern for the 15R second, third and sixth jackpots and the opening pattern for the 15R first and fifth jackpots are the 1R and 2R (V round) opening modes. Is different. And in the 15R 1st and 5th big hits, the 2nd big prize opening 35 is opened for 28 seconds at the 1R and 2R, respectively. The game ball enters the second grand prize opening 35 almost certainly and passes through the specific area 39 with a high probability. On the other hand, in the 15R second, third and sixth big hits, the second big prize opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds at the 1R and 2R, respectively. It is very difficult to enter. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the execution of the big hit game related to the 15R second, third, and sixth big hits is considerably lower than the 15R first and fifth big hits, It is virtually impossible to pass.

  It should be noted that the big hits (15R first big hit and 15R fifth big hit in this example) in which the V round is executed in a mode in which the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39 (V passability) is extremely high is referred to as “V It is also called “scheduled big hit”, and the big round (15R second big hit, 15R third big hit, and 15R sixth big hit in this example) that V round is executed in a mode with very low possibility of passing V It is also called “big hit”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when the 2R fourth big hit is achieved (when the 2R fourth big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), the second big prize opening from 1R to 2R is obtained. Open 35 for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. At this time, the total opening time of the 2nd big prize opening 35 of the 1R and 2R is a maximum of 1.8 seconds, so that the game ball enters the second big prize opening 35 during the round. The specific area 39 can be passed. In this pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, one game ball is launched in about 0.6 seconds, so if the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 is 1.8 seconds It is sufficiently possible to aim at the passing of the game ball to the specific area 39 by causing the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 35. However, since the total opening time of the 2nd big winning opening is as short as 1.8 seconds, the 2R fourth big hit cannot expect as many prize balls (game profits) as the other 15R big hits. In other words, it is a big hit where almost no prize ball can be obtained compared to other big hits.

  In addition, when the first small hit is reached (when the first small symbol display is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a) and when the second small hit is reached (when the second special symbol display 41b is displayed). When the second small winning symbol is stopped and displayed), the second big prize opening 35 is opened twice for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. That is, the big winning opening is opened with the same opening pattern as the 2R fourth big hit. Even in this small hit, since the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 is 1.8 seconds in total, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the second big prize opening 35 and pass through the specific area 39. Yes. However, as described above, even if there is a passage to the specific area 39 in the small hit game, there is no change in the gaming state before and after the small hit game. In addition, in the small hit game, the total opening time of the big winning opening is as short as 1.8 seconds, so it is not possible to expect as many prize balls as the 2R fourth big hit. That is, the small hits are those that have almost no special benefits for the player in terms of game state transition and prize balls (only for prize balls by entering).

  In the present embodiment, as the opening pattern of the second grand prize opening 35, the first opening pattern that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 (easy to pass) (15 first big hit, 15R fifth big hit), the game ball And the second opening pattern in which it is difficult to pass (cannot pass) the specific area 39 (15R second big hit, 15R third big hit, 15R sixth big hit), the game ball can pass the specific area and the first opening It is possible to have a third opening pattern (2R fourth big hit) that is less likely to pass than the pattern. In addition, as an opening pattern for small hits, there is a fourth opening pattern in which a game ball can pass through the specific area 39 but does not give a privilege even if it passes (does not generate a high probability state). can do. This 4th opening pattern is good also as an opening pattern which cannot pass through specific field 39 as other modes.

  When the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is determined to be a big hit, the distribution probability to each big hit is 40% for 15R first big hit, 20% for 15R second big hit, and 15R third big hit. 30%, 2R 4th big hit is 10% (refer to the big hit type determining random number column in FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the second special symbol (special drawing 2), the distribution probability to each big hit is 80% for the 15R fifth big hit and 20% for the 15R sixth big hit. (Refer to the jackpot type determination random number column in FIG. 6). This distribution probability represents the possibility that the game ball will pass through the specific area 39 during the big hit game, that is, the probability that the game ball will be in a high probability state. It can be said that it represents the probability of

  That is, for the probability of becoming a high probability state, if the win / fail judgment (first special symbol success / fail judgment) based on entering the first starting port 20 is a big hit, the probability is at least 40%, Including the case where the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the big hit game related to the 2R fourth big hit, the probability is 50%. On the other hand, in the case of a win / loss determination (second special symbol success / failure determination) based on a ball entering the second starting port 21, the probability is 80%.

  In addition, regarding the probability of becoming a high base state, if the game is in the gaming state where the open extension function is not activated (low base state) and the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit, the probability is 60%. Including the 2R fourth big hit in the case of a big hit in the first special symbol determination in the high base state, the probability is 70%. On the other hand, when it is a big hit in the second special symbol success / failure determination, the probability is 100%. Then, when the big special is a big hit in the second special symbol success / failure determination, the 2R big hit that can occur when the first special symbol is a big hit is not generated, and it is always a 15R big hit.

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, rather than being a big hit in the first special symbol success / failure determination (the big win lottery of the first special symbol) performed by the game ball entering the first starting port 20, In the second special symbol success / failure determination (the big special lottery drawing of the second special symbol) performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the winner is larger than that in the first special symbol success / failure determination. The probability of becoming a high probability state, the probability of becoming a high base state, and the possibility of acquiring 15R prize balls is high. In other words, it is set to be more likely to be advantageous to the player in the case of a big win in the second special symbol success / failure determination than in the case of a big hit in the first special symbol success / failure determination. There is a higher possibility that the player who displays the 2 special symbols is more advantageous for the player than the player who displays the first special symbols. For this reason, the player will play a game in anticipation of entering the second start port 21. This is particularly noticeable during the operation of the open extension function (high base state) in which the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 increases. The above-mentioned distribution probability is an example, and can be arbitrarily set in consideration of game playability, specifications, and the like.

  In this embodiment, since the second special symbol is superior to the first special symbol, both the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display can be executed, that is, When both the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are “1” or more, the change display of the second special symbol (digestion of the second special figure hold) is displayed as the change display of the first special symbol (first It is assumed to be given priority over (digestion of one special figure hold). As a result, the high base state in which the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 increases can be said to be a state in which the game can be advantageously advanced because the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special symbol increases. Nevertheless, the fact that the first special symbol variation display is performed in the high base state means that the player is drained by the game in a very advantageous state (high base state). Since the change display of the 1 special symbol may be disadvantageous compared to the change display of the second special symbol, it can be said that the change display of the first special symbol in the high base state is not desirable for the player.

  Here, as a special symbol stop display mode, the big hit symbol is also called “specific mode” or “specific display result”, and the small hit symbol is also called “predetermined mode” or “predetermined display result”. The symbol is also referred to as “non-specific mode” or “non-specific display result”. Also, a jackpot game that does not trigger the setting of the high base state (for example, the 15R third jackpot symbol) or a high probability state setting possibility (V passability) is extremely low (substantially zero). A big hit symbol (for example, 15R second, third and sixth big hit symbols), and a big hit symbol (for example, 2R big hit symbol) that triggers the execution of a big hit game with a relatively small number of rounds, that is, for the player A jackpot symbol with a relatively low degree of advantage is also referred to as a “first specific mode” or a “first specific display result”, and is executed in response to a stop display of a jackpot symbol with a relatively low degree of advantage. The big hit game is also called “first special game”.

  In addition, a jackpot symbol (for example, 15R 1st, 2nd, 5th, 6th jackpot symbol) that becomes a trigger for setting a high base state by comparison with a jackpot symbol that does not trigger a setting for a high base state, or a setting for a high probability state A jackpot symbol (for example, 15R 1st, 5th) that triggers the execution of a jackpot game with a very high probability setting possibility (V pathability) compared to a jackpot game with a very low possibility (V passability) The jackpot symbol (for example, 15R jackpot symbol) that triggers the execution of a jackpot game with a relatively large number of rounds in comparison with the jackpot symbol that triggers the execution of a jackpot game with a relatively small number of rounds In other words, a jackpot symbol with a relatively high degree of advantage for the player is also called a “second specific mode” or “second specific display result”. Ri that of the big hit game that is executed in response to stop display of the symbols is also referred to as "the second a special game." In addition, a game state in which a special symbol variation display can be executed, and a game state in which the release extension function is not activated (low base state) is also referred to as a “first game state”, and a game state in which the release extension function is activated. (High base state) is also referred to as “second gaming state”.

  In this pachinko machine 1, the determination of whether or not the big hit or the small hit is made is based on a “random symbol for determining whether or not to win a special symbol” (also referred to as “information for determining whether or not to win”). Is determined on the basis of “a jackpot type determining random number (also referred to as“ symbol determining random number ”or“ symbol determining information ”). As shown in FIG. 7A, the special symbol success / failure determination random number takes a value in the range of “0 to 629”, and the big hit type determination random number takes a value in the range of “0 to 99”. The random numbers (acquired information) acquired based on the balls entering the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 include “variation pattern random number” in addition to the special symbol success / failure determination random number and the jackpot type determining random number. (Also referred to as “variation pattern information”). The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern including a variation time, and takes a value in a range of “0 to 198”. In addition, the random numbers acquired based on the passage through the gate 28 include the normal symbol success / failure determination random numbers shown in FIG. The random number for normal symbol success / failure determination is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second start port 21 (normal symbol lottery), and takes a value in the range of “0 to 240”.

  Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a plurality of gaming states by combining a probability variation function for a special symbol, a probability variation function for a normal symbol, a variation time shortening function, and an open extension function into an activated state or an inactivated state. ing. A state in which the probability variation function is activated for a special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is called a “high probability state”, and a state in which the probability variation function is not activated is a “normal state (also called a“ low probability state ”). " In the high probability state, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the special symbol success / failure determination is higher than in the normal state. In other words, in the normal state, the success / failure determination is performed using the normal state hit determination table, and in the high probability state, the value of the special symbol success / failure determination random number determined to be the big hit is higher than the normal state. The determination is made using the determination table (see FIG. 8A). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the display result of the special symbol variation display becomes a big hit (the stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol) is higher than when the special symbol probability variation function is not activated. The operation of the probability variation function is controlled by the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81). Therefore, the main control board 80 (the game control microcomputer 81) is a probability setting means that can set the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol success / failure determination to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability). It functions.

  For special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the variable time reduction function is operating is called “short-time state” or “short-time state”. "Or" normal fluctuation state ". In the short time state, the average value of the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variation display to the time of the fixed display) is shorter than the average value of the variation time of the special symbol in the non-short time state. That is, in the short-time state, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more than in the non-time-short state (see FIG. 9). . As a result, in the short-time state, the digestion pace of the special figure reservation is increased, and effective entry into the starting port (entrance that can be stored as special figure reservation) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with smooth progress of the game. The main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) controls the operation / non-operation of the variable time shortening function. Therefore, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) functions as a shortened variation state setting means capable of setting a shortened variation state in which the variation time of the special symbol is shorter than usual.

  The probability variation function and variation time shortening function for the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) may be activated at the same time, or only one of them may be activated. The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbol are operated in synchronization with the special symbol variation time shortening function. That is, the probability variation function and variation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the short time state of the special symbol, and do not operate in the non-short time state. For this reason, in the time reduction state, the hit probability in the normal symbol success / failure determination is higher than that in the non-time reduction state. Specifically, in the short-time state, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment is made using a normal symbol per-decision table in which the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined to be hit is larger than the normal symbol per-judgment determination table used in the non-time-short state. Normal symbol determination) is performed (see FIG. 8C).

  In the short time state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter than in the non-short time state. In this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-short-time state, but is 1 second in the short-time state (see FIG. 8D). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) is activated, and the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the non-time-saving state. In addition, in the short-time state, the opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22 is activated, and the number of times the second start port 21 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than that in the non-short-time state. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination is successful in the non-time-short state, the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 (second start port 21) performs the opening operation for 0.2 seconds once, and the time-short state When the result of normal symbol win / fail determination is successful, the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) performs the opening operation for 2.0 seconds three times.

  In the situation where the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbol, and the opening time extension function and the opening number increase function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, compared to the case where these functions are not activated. Thus, the second start port 21 is frequently opened, and the frequency of entering game balls into the second start port 21 is increased (also referred to as “high frequency state”). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls, becomes high. Therefore, a state where these functions are operated is also referred to as a “high base state”, and a state where these functions are not operated is also referred to as a “low base state”. In addition, in the high base state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second start port 21 increases, and accordingly, the frequency of execution of the variable symbol special symbol display (here, the second special symbol) also increases. . Therefore, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the hand-held game balls (held balls).

  In the high base state (high frequency state), all the above functions may not operate. That is, when the function is not activated by the activation of at least one of the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbol, and the opening time extending function and the opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22. However, it is sufficient that the second start port 21 is easily opened (the frequency of entering the ball is high). Further, the high base state may be independently controlled without accompanying the time-short state of the special symbol. A function for generating such a high base state can also be referred to as a “high base generation function”.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game state after the big hit game in the case of 15R first and fifth big hits is special if the game ball passes the specific area 39 during the big hit game. A high probability state of the symbol, a short time state of the special symbol, and a high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “highly accurate base state”. The high-accuracy base state ends when a special symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) or a big hit game is executed with a big hit.

  In addition, the game state after the big hit game in the case of 15R second and sixth big hits is the normal state of the special symbol because it is extremely difficult for the game ball to pass the specific area 39 during the big hit game. In addition to this, the special symbol has a short time and high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low probability and high base state”. In the low-accuracy base state, a special symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) or a special symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). The game is terminated when a special game (bonus game) related to the jackpot is executed. Although the possibility is extremely low, if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the big hit game related to the 15R second and sixth big hits, the game state after the big hit game is “high probability”. High base state ". Although the possibility is extremely low, if the game ball does not pass the specific area 39 during the big hit game related to the 15R first and fifth big hits, the gaming state after the big hit game is “ “Low accuracy and high base state”.

  In addition, the game state after the big hit game in the case of 15R third big hit becomes the normal state of the special symbol because the possibility that the game ball will pass the specific area 39 during the big hit game is very low. In addition to this, the special symbol becomes a non-time-short state and a low base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low probability low base state”. The low probability low base state is a basic game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, an initial game state. Although the possibility is extremely low, if a game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the big hit game related to the 15R third big hit, the gaming state after the big hit game ends will be described in “High Probability”. "Low base state".

  Also, in the low probability low base state, the game state after the big hit game in the case of 2R fourth big hit is a high probability of a special symbol if the game ball passes the specific area 39 during the big hit game. The state becomes a non-time-short state and a low base state of a special symbol (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “highly accurate low base state”. The high probability low base state ends when a special symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) or a big hit game is executed.

  This highly accurate low base state is a state in which it is latent that it is a high probability state, that is, a state in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that it is a high probability state. That is, the high-accuracy low-base state is a so-called “latent probability variation state (also referred to as“ probability non-notification state ”)”. On the other hand, it is clear to the player that the high-accuracy and high-base state is a high-probability state. That is, the high-accuracy and high-base state is a so-called “probability game state”.

  In addition, in the high base state, the game state after the big hit game when the 2R fourth big hit is reached is the “highly accurate high base state” if the game ball passes the specific area 39 during the big hit game. (See FIG. 6). That is, the special symbol time-saving function and the base state are the same as the state before the big hit game is executed.

  In a high base state such as a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously if the game ball is advanced to the right game area 3B by hitting right. In the high base state, it is easier to open the second start port 21 than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second start port 21 than to enter the first start port 20. Because. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed to the gate 28 which is a trigger for the normal symbol success / failure determination, and the player makes a right stroke to enter the game ball into the second starting port 21. Also, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not special symbols are appropriate). In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to be lit in a predetermined manner, and notifies that it should be fired to the right game area (right-handed instruction notification).

  On the other hand, in the low base state such as the high probability low base state or the low probability low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by making the game ball enter the left game area 3A by left-handed. In the low base state, the second start port 21 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and entering the first start port 20 is easier than entering the second start port 21. Because. For this reason, in the low base state, by making a left turn to make a game ball enter the first start port 20, it is possible to obtain a larger number of start balls (opportunities for determining whether or not a special symbol is won) rather than making a right turn. Can do. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to be turned on (display control) in a predetermined manner, and notifies that it should be fired to the left game area (left-handed instruction notification).

  Specifically, the firing direction indicator 47 is composed of two “yz” LEDs, and indicates the firing direction by lighting the LEDs according to the gaming state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that it should be fired to the left game area as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “y □ z □” (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are lit, such as “y ■ z ■” (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can.

  In the present embodiment, the LED display mode of the firing direction indicator 47 is used to issue a firing instruction notification instructing which of the left game area 3A and the right game area 3B of the game area 3 is to be fired. Not only that, but also the display of the firing instruction image (left-handed instruction image 70, right-handed instruction image 71) on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) is performed. In general, for the player, it can be said that the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) is easier to see and understand (understand) the display content than the firing direction indicator 47. Therefore, in general, the player should look at the firing instruction image displayed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and determine whether to perform “left-handed” or “right-handed”. It is determined whether the current gaming state is a “left-handed gaming state” in which a left-handed strike is made or a “right-handed gaming state” in which a right-handed strike is made.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the low probability low base state in which the small hit game or the big hit game is not performed as a reference, the low probability low base state is referred to as the “normal game state” or A game in which the special symbol is variably displayed in the state can be regarded as a “normal game”.

  The jackpot game is a game that can be executed by variably displaying a special symbol and stopping the jackpot symbol, and for the player, a big prize opening (first big prize opening 32, second big prize winning) Since it is an advantageous game in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained by entering a game ball into the mouth 35), the big hit game can be regarded as a “special game”, and the game state in which the big hit game is performed Can be regarded as “special gaming state”.

  In addition, although the small hit game is not as big as the big hit game, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by entering a game ball into the big prize opening (the first big prize opening 32 and the second big prize opening 35). It can be said that the game is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. Therefore, the small hit game can also be regarded as a “special game”, and the game state in which the small hit game is played can also be regarded as a “special game state”. In addition, in order to distinguish the special game as the big hit game and the special game as the small hit game, the special game as the small hit game can be regarded as a “small profit special game”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the gaming state is in the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or the high base state (highly accurate high base state, low probability low base state), the “right strike” is performed. Therefore, the “right-handed gaming state” indicates a special gaming state or a high base state. This “right-handed gaming state” is also referred to as “predetermined gaming state”, the “special gaming state” is also referred to as “first predetermined gaming state”, and the “high base state” is referred to as “second predetermined gaming state”. Also called.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main process program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. . As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter reset Etc. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  Subsequent to the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the value of the various random number counters shown in FIG. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, the interruption is permitted (S104). While the interrupt is permitted, the interrupt process (S105) can be executed. This interrupt process (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 ms. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is finished and before the next interrupt process (S105) is started, the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt process (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt process (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt process (S105), first, an output process (S201) is executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub-control board 90, the payout control board 110, etc. To do. The commands that are output here include the gaming status, special symbol success / failure determination, jackpot type, variation pattern, game ball entrance to various entrances (starting entrance, big winning entrance, etc.), round Various information regarding the progress of the game and the like is included. The command is composed of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information regarding the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information regarding the content of the command.

  In the input process (S202) performed subsequent to the output process (S201), various sensors (a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a first big prize port sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. 30a, the second big prize opening sensor 35a, the general prize opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) are read and stored in the RAM output buffer as prize ball information. Further, when the first start port sensor 20a or the second start port sensor 21a detects a game ball, the start input command corresponding to each start port is output to the output buffer of the RAM by a start ball entering process (S205) described later. To remember. Further, a detection signal from a lower plate full switch for detecting the fullness of the lower plate 62 is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as lower plate full data.

  The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values (including normal symbol random number counter values) shown in FIG. 7 includes the execution period of the timer interrupt process (S105) and the other period (after the end of the interrupt process (S105), The period until the next interrupt process (S105) is started).

  Following normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S203), starting port sensor detection processing (S204), starting ball entering processing (S205), ordinary diagram motion processing (S206), special symbol motion processing (S207) Specific area sensor detection processing (S208), reserved ball number processing (S209), and power-off monitoring processing (S210) are executed. In addition, the “other processing” necessary for progressing the game is executed, and the interrupt processing (S105) is terminated. Then, the main control main process S102 to S104 is repeatedly executed until an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (see FIG. 10). When the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 msec) ), Interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command set in the RAM output buffer in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 12, in the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). ). If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305, and if the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), the number of normal symbol reserve balls (normal figure hold) (Specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of pending reservations provided in the RAM) is less than 4 (S302).

  If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not less than 4 (NO in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if the number of normal symbol reserved balls is less than 4 (YES in S302), “1” is added to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random symbol counter for normal symbol determination (label-TRND-H) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired, and the acquired random number value is obtained. (Acquired information) is stored in an address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls in the general symbol reserved storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

  In S305, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second start port 21, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start port sensor 21a (S305). If a game ball has not entered the second start port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309, and if a game ball has entered the second start port 21 (YES in S305). The special figure 2 reserved ball count (the number of the second special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the second special figure hold provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) is less than 4 (upper limit number). It is determined whether or not (S306). If the special figure 2 reserved ball number is not less than 4 (NO in S306), the process proceeds to S309. If the special figure 2 reserved ball number is less than 4 (YES in S306), the special figure 1 is added to the number of 2 reserved balls (S307).

  Subsequently, special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S308) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the random number counter for special symbol determination (label-TRND-A) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, the random number for determining the big hit type The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the random number value shown in FIG. 7A is acquired), and the acquired random value (acquired) Information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved special figure 2 balls in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 20, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a (S309). If no game ball has entered the first start port 20 (NO in S309), the process is completed. If a game ball has entered the first start port 20 (YES in S309), the special figure 1 is displayed. Whether or not the number of reserved balls (the number of first special figure reservations, specifically, the value of the counter for counting the number of first special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) is less than 4 (upper limit number) (S310). If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not less than 4 (NO in S310), the process is completed. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than 4 (YES in S310), the number of Special Figure 1 held balls “1” is added to (S311).

  Subsequently, special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S312) is performed. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312), as in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol success / failure determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (Label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (Label-TRND-T1) are obtained (that is, the disturbance shown in FIG. 7A). A numerical value is acquired), and these acquired random number values are stored in an address space corresponding to the current number of reserved figure 1 reserved balls in the first figure reserved storage unit.

  Here, among various acquired random numbers (acquired information) acquired based on the game balls entering the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21, a value determined as a big hit in the special symbol success / failure determination This is also referred to as “specific acquisition information”, and a value that is not determined to be a big hit in the special symbol success / failure determination (a value that is determined to be out of play or a small hit in this embodiment) is also referred to as “non-specific acquisition information”. Also, jackpots that do not trigger the setting of a high base state (for example, 15R third jackpot), or V non-passing scheduled jackpots (for example, 15R second, third, and third jackpots) that have a very low possibility of setting a high probability state (V passability). A value determined to be a big hit with a relatively low degree of advantage for the player, such as a big hit with a relatively small number of rounds (for example, a 2R big hit) is also referred to as “first specific acquisition information”. There is a possibility of setting a big hit (for example, 15R 1st, 2nd, 5th, 6th big hit) or a high probability state as a trigger for setting a high base state in comparison with a big hit that does not become a trigger for setting a high base state Compared with a low V non-passing jackpot, the possibility of setting a high probability state is very high, for example, a V passing jackpot (for example, 15R first and fifth jackpots), and a comparison with a jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds La Like number command is relatively large jackpot (e.g. 15R jackpot), also referred to a value advantageous degree for the player is determined to relatively high jackpot as "second identification obtaining information".

[Processing at start-up]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a start ball entry process (S205) following the start port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the starting ball entry process (S205), it is first determined whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (S315). If it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls in S307 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second start port. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

  In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit is read ( S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, the value of the random number counter for special symbol success / failure determination (the random number value for special symbol success / failure determination) among the read acquired random number values, in principle, depends on the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state). If the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big hit is further determined. The process of S317 corresponds to a pre-determination (so-called “hold prefetch”) performed prior to the success / failure determination (S1303, S1309) in the special figure 2 determination determination process (S1202) described later.

  Pre-judgment of whether or not a big hit is a big hit decision table (see FIG. 8A), that is, a big hit decision table for a high probability state in a high probability state, normal in a normal state (low probability state) It is possible to determine whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value based on the state jackpot determination table. As other prior determination modes, as a variation pattern information determination table capable of determining variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table for a high probability state And. In advance determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on an acquired random number value (a value of a random symbol counter for special symbol success / failure determination and the like) and a variation pattern information determination table corresponding to the gaming state. Is possible. From the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not a big hit type, a big hit type, whether or not a game effect with high reliability is executed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, regarding the prior determination as to whether or not the big hit, in addition to the prior determination according to the current game state (probability state) (at the start of the start), it is different from the current game state (probability state) It is also possible to make a prior determination according to a gaming state (probability state) that can be controlled by the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the current gaming state is a low probability state, it is possible to make a pre-determination assuming that the gaming state is a high probability state, and when the current gaming state is a high probability state, It is possible to make a prior determination assuming that the gaming state is a low probability state. Specifically, if the current gaming state is a normal state (low probability state), it is determined whether or not it matches the big hit determination value by the normal state big hit determination table, and the high probability state big hit determination table. If the current gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination value matches with the jackpot determination table for the high probability state. It is determined whether or not the jackpot determination value matches the normal jackpot determination table. Thereby, when the special symbol success / failure determination based on the gaming state when the prior determination is performed and the acquired random value (acquired information) that is the target of the prior determination is performed (that is, when the special figure is suspended) Even if it is different from the gaming state, it is possible to make a preliminary determination in anticipation of the game state, and the result can be reflected in an effect based on the preliminary determination result (holding pre-reading effect).

  Next, in S318, game information (preliminary determination information) related to the result of the preliminary determination in S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining whether or not the special symbol matches the jackpot determination value (presence / absence information), Command data including information indicating the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (random number for jackpot type determination), information indicating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (fluctuation pattern random number value), etc. And the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). In addition, as a special figure 2 start entering command, a part or all of the special figure 2 acquisition random number value read in S316 may be transmitted to the sub control board as it is, or the special figure 2 acquisition random number value may be transmitted. The game information acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number (for example, the above-described variation pattern information) may be transmitted without transmitting as it is.

  In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 90 analyzes the special figure 2 start entering command transmitted from the main control unit 80 to determine whether it is information related to the big hit, which is the type of the big hit, and the variation pattern is The sub-control unit 90 can identify which one is. In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering command, whether or not the obtained special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when judged in a high probability state, and low probability It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when judged by the state. Thereby, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start ball entering command as a hold (effect hold information), pre-determines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not it is a low probability state. Production hold information determined to be a big hit, production hold information judged to be a big hit when a success determination is made in a high probability state, and both a case where a success decision is made in a low probability state and a case where a success decision is made in a high probability state Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not the production hold information determined to be a big hit is stored.

  For the purpose of preventing fraud, the random number value for determining whether or not the special symbol is determined is not directly transmitted to the sub-control unit among the acquired random number values read out in S316, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other big hit type (big hit value) The command data including the information indicating the type determination random number) and the variation pattern random number counter value (variation pattern random value) and the information indicating the result of the preliminary determination is generated as a special figure 2 start entry command. It is possible to set.

  Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 has increased by “1” as in the process related to the special figure 2 described above (S319). If it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S320. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the special figure 1 number of reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process is terminated as it is.

  In S320, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON (S320). When it is determined that the time reduction flag is ON, that is, in the high base state (YES in S320), the processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S320 that the time reduction flag is OFF, that is, it is in the low base state (NO in S320), the process proceeds to the pre-determination process after S321.

  The processing of S321 to S323 is the same processing as that of S316 to S318 described above with reference to FIG. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit is read (S321), A prior determination is made for the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, command data including game information related to this pre-determination is generated as a special FIG. 1 start entering command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). The prior determination (holding prefetching) in S322 is performed prior to the determination (S1603, S1609) in the special figure 1 determination process (S1207) described later.

  Here, in the high base state, the open extension function that increases the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 is activated, and the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is successful (see FIG. 8B) is easily performed. In other words, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed at a high frequency. Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, it is assumed that the special figure 2 reserved digest (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the special figure 1 reserved digest (variable display of the first special symbol). Yes. In such a configuration, for example, when the preliminary determination of FIG. 1 is performed, the result is notified to the player by an effect such as a notice, and it is clearly indicated that the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit, By using the priority of special figure 2 reserve digestion, special figure 2 hold is intentionally lost at any timing (set to “0”), and the jackpot related to special figure 1 in which the result of the prior determination is shown is Technical intervention such as intentional generation is possible. It is not preferable from the viewpoint of game fairness that the player can adjust the occurrence timing of the big hit in this way.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the current gaming state is the high base state (YES in S320), the processing related to the prior determination in FIG. 1 after S321 is not performed. In other words, pre-determination related to special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 pre-determination) is to be performed in low base state instead of high base state. Is performed regardless of whether the base state is the low base state or the high base state. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described later, during the big hit game, the low probability and low base state is controlled. However, during the big hit game, the game ball enters the first start opening 20 and is special. Even if the number of reserved balls in FIG. 1 increases by “1”, the processing of S321 to S323 (special figure 1 preliminary determination processing) is not performed.

[Usuzu movement process]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a general operation process (S207) shown in FIG. 14 subsequent to the start-entering game process (S206). In the normal drawing operation process (S207), the processing related to the normal symbol display device 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and “normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4” is assigned to each of these stages. . If the “normal operation status” is “1” (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and if the “normal operation status” is “2” (S401) NO, YES in S403), normal symbol change processing (S404) is performed, and when the “normal figure movement status” is “3” (NO in S401, S403, YES in S405), the normal symbol is fixed The process (S406) is performed, and when the “normal operation status” is “4” (NO in all of S401, S403, and S405), the ordinary electric accessory process (S407) is performed. The normal operation status is “1” by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is “0” (S501), and if it is “0” (YES in S501). ) And finish this process. On the other hand, if it is not “0” (NO in S501), a normal symbol success / failure determination process described later is performed (S502), and then a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, with reference to the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the gaming state is a short-time state, the ordinary symbol variation pattern with a 1 second variation time is selected. To do. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a non-time-short state, the normal symbol variation pattern with the normal symbol variation time of 30 seconds is selected. When the normal symbol variation pattern selection processing (S503) is completed, a normal symbol random number shift processing (S504) described later is performed, then a normal symbol variation start processing (S505) is performed, and the processing ends. In the normal symbol variation start process, the normal symbol variation display is started based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to “2”. In the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set in order to notify the sub control board 90 of the start of variation of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol success / failure determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal symbol success / failure determination process (S502), first, the value (label -TRND-H) of the normal symbol success / failure determination random number counter stored in the general symbol hold storage unit is read (S601). . Next, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON (that is, whether or not the gaming state is a time reduction state) (S602). If it is determined in S602 that the time reduction flag is ON, that is, it is in the time reduction state (YES in S602), the table for the time reduction state (the hit determination value is “0” in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8C). 0 ”to“ 239 ”), it is determined whether or not the winning is based on the high-probability normal figure determination (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for normal symbol appropriateness determination (label-TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values. On the other hand, if it is determined in S602 that the time reduction flag is not ON, that is, it is in the non-time reduction state (NO in S602), the table for the non-time reduction state in the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the low-probability normal-winning determination based on the determination values “0” and “1”) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal signal win / fail determination (S603, S604) is a hit (per normal map) (S605), and if it is determined to be out (NO in S605), the normal symbol for stop display is displayed. (Unusual symbol) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal map) in S605 (YES in S605), a hit normal symbol (symbol per base symbol) to be stopped is determined (S607), and the per-general symbol flag is turned ON (S608). ) Finish the process.

[Normal design random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the normal symbol holding ball number is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each general map hold in the general map storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-order reserved storage in the ordinary figure storage area, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth ordinary figure storage area is cleared to 0 (S703). ) Finish the process. In this way, ordinary map suspension is digested in order of suspension.

[Normal symbol change processing]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol changing process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol change time has passed (S801), and if it has not passed (NO in S801), the process ends. . On the other hand, if it has elapsed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802) and the normal symbol operation status is set to “3” (S803). Then, other processing such as stopping the normal symbol fluctuation display with the display result (winning normal symbol or off-normal symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for normal symbol success / failure determination is performed (S804). Finish.

[Normal symbol confirmation processing]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the normal symbol determination process (S406), it is first determined whether or not the universal symbol flag is ON (S901). If the ordinary figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the normal hit flag is ON (YES in S901), it is subsequently determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON, that is, whether or not the time reduction state is in effect (S902). If it is in the time-short state (YES in S902), the opening pattern in the time-short state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S903). As described above, the release pattern in the short-time state is an release pattern in which the release for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, “3” is set in the second start port opening counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

  On the other hand, if it is in the non-short-time state (NO in S902), the opening pattern in the non-time-short state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S906). The opening pattern in the non-time-short state is an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.2 seconds is performed once as described above. Accordingly, “1” is set in the second start port opening counter. Then, following the setting of the release pattern (S903, S906), the normal operation status is set to “4” (S904), and this process is completed.

[Normal electric equipment processing]
As shown in FIG. 20, in the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end-of-common-use flag is ON (S1001). The normal hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a win.

  If the normal hit end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second start port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not the timing (timing) for opening the second starting port 21 has been reached (S1003). If so (YES in S1003), the second start port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second start port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is determined in advance whether or not the timing (timing) for closing the second start port 21 has been reached (that is, after the second start port 21 is opened). (S1005), and if not reached (NO in S1005), the process is finished. If it has reached (YES in S1005), the second start port 21 is closed (closed). ) (S1006).

  Then, following the closing process of the second start port 21 (S1006), the value of the second start port open counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the second start port open counter is “0”. (S1008). If it is not “0” (NO in S1008), the process is finished as it is to open the second start port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is “0” (YES in S1008), the base game end process for ending the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the base map end flag is set (S1010) to end the process. The second start port opening counter is set to “0” when the second start port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times if it is in the time-short state, and if it is in the non-time-short state. When the second start port 21 is opened once, it becomes “0”.

On the other hand, if the end-of-usage flag is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second start port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended. The winning end flag is turned off (S1011), the ordinary figure hitting flag is turned off (S1012), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal operation process (FIG. 13).
[Normal electric equipment processing]
As shown in FIG. 20, in the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not an end flag for the normal drawing is ON (S1001). The normal hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a win.

  If the normal hit end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second start port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not the timing (timing) for opening the second start port 21 has been reached (S1003). If this is the case, the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second start port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is determined in advance whether or not the timing (timing) for closing the second start port 21 has been reached (that is, after the second start port 21 is opened). (S1005). If not reached (NO in S1005), the process is finished. If it has reached (YES in S1005), the second start port 21 is closed (closed). (S1006).

  Then, after the closing process (S1006) of the second starting port 21, the value of the second starting port opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and whether or not the value of the second starting port opening counter is “0”. Determine (S1008). If it is not “0” (NO in S1008), the process is finished as it is to open the second start port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is “0” (YES in S1008), the base game end process for ending the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the base map end flag is set (S1010) to end the process. The second start port opening counter is set to “0” when the second start port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times if it is in the time-short state, and if it is in the non-time-short state. When the second start port 21 is opened once, it becomes “0”.

  On the other hand, if the end-of-usage flag is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second start port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended. The winning end flag is turned off (S1011), the ordinary figure hitting flag is turned off (S1012), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal operation process (FIG. 13).

[Special figure operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure operation process (S207) after the ordinary figure operation process (S206). As shown in FIG. 21, in the special figure operation process (S207), the processes related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) are divided into five stages. "Special figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each stage. If the special figure operation status is “1” (YES in S1101), a special symbol standby process (S1102) is performed. If the special figure operation status is “2” (NO in S1101, YES in S1103). Special symbol variation processing (S1104) is performed. If the special symbol movement status is “3” (NO in S1101, S1103, YES in S1105), special symbol confirmation processing (S1106) is performed. When the operation status is “4” (both NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, YES in S1107), special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) as a big hit game is performed, and the special figure operation status is “5”. In some cases (S1101, S1103, S1105, S1107 are all NO), special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) as a small hit game is performed. The special figure operation status is “1” by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (that is, the number of reserved figures 2 reserved balls) at the second start port 21 is “0” (S1201). ). Special Figure 2 If the number of reserved balls is “0” (YES in S1201), that is, if there is no random number counter value acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, the first start It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1) is “0” (S1206). If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is also “0” (YES in S1206), that is, if there is no random number counter value acquired based on the ball entering the first start port 20, the image It is determined whether or not the display screen 7a of the display device 7 is being processed as a standby screen (during execution of a customer waiting demo screen) (S1211). If it is being processed (YES in S1211), the processing is performed. If not completed and not being processed (NO in S1211), standby screen setting processing is executed to display the standby screen (S1212).

  In S1201, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is not “0” (NO in S1201), that is, if there is one or more random number counter values acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 The special figure 2 success / failure determination process (S1202), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1203), the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) described later are performed in this order. Also, when the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “0” but the special figure 1 reserved ball number is not “0” (YES in S1201 and NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value related to the second start port 21 If there is one or more random number counter values stored based on the entry into the first starting port 20, there is no memory, but a special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1207), which will be described later, Pattern selection processing (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1209), and special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1210) are performed in this order. Thus, in the present embodiment, the change display of the first special symbol based on the first special figure holding is performed only when the special figure 2 holding ball number is “0” (YES in S1201). That is, the digestion of the second special symbol hold (the change display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special symbol hold (the change display of the first special symbol). In this embodiment, the success / failure determination based on the second special figure hold is more likely to be a big hit with a larger profit for the player than the success / failure determination based on the first special figure hold (FIG. 8B). )).

[Special Figure 2 Decision Processing]
As shown in FIG. 23, in the special figure 2 success / failure determination process (S1202), first, as the determination value, the lowest area of the second special figure reservation storage part of the RAM (that is, the first special figure reservation first). The value (label-TRND-A) of the special symbol success / failure random number counter stored in the corresponding RAM area is read (S1301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in a high probability state (S1302). If it is not the high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if it is the normal state, the hit determination table for the normal state (the big hit determination value is “3”) in the hit determination table (see FIG. 8A). , “397”), a determination is made (S1303). On the other hand, if the state is a high probability state (YES in S1302), the success / failure determination is performed based on the big hit determination table for the high probability state in the hit determination table (see FIG. 8A) (S1309). In the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, the jackpot determination values are “3”, “53”, “113”, “173”, “227”, “281”, “337”, “397”, “449”, “503”.

  When it is determined that the result of the determination (S1303, S1309) is “big hit” (YES in S1304), the value of the random number counter for determining the big hit type (label-TRND-AS) is read out and shown in FIG. The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown (S1310), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1311), the jackpot flag is turned on (S1312), and the process is terminated. . In the case of determination of success / failure related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type determination table is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of determination of success / failure related to the second special symbol, The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. If the first special symbol (special figure 1) is determined to be a big hit, it is one of 15R first big hit, 15R second big hit, 15R third big hit and 2R fourth big hit, If it is determined that the special symbol (special symbol 2) is a big hit, it is a 15R fifth big hit or a 15R sixth big hit (see FIG. 8B).

  Correspondingly, in this embodiment, the big hit flag is ON when the type of big hit is 15R first big hit, 15R second big hit, 15R third big hit, 15R fifth big hit or 15R sixth big hit. And a short hit flag that is turned on when the 2R fourth big hit is made. When the 2R fourth big hit is turned on and the short hit flag is turned ON, the 2R lamp (see FIG. 4) of the round indicator 45 is turned on at the timing when the 2R fourth big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Is done. Specifically, the display mode is “2R ▲ 15RΔ” (for example, ▲: ON, Δ: OFF). In addition, when the long hit flag is turned ON in any of 15R first big hit, 15R second big hit, 15R third big hit, 15R fifth big hit and 15R fifth big hit, the timing when the corresponding big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. Thus, the 15R lamp (see FIG. 4) is turned on. Specifically, the display mode is “2RΔ15R ▲”.

  Here, the jackpot determination (special symbol success / failure determination) and the jackpot type determination determination may be referred to as “determination”, respectively, and may be referred to as “determination” including which jackpot symbol will be obtained by performing the jackpot determination. Good. In addition, these results may be referred to as “determination results”.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the success / failure determination (S1303, S1309) is not “big hit” (NO in S1304), it is determined whether it is a small hit (S1305). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the special symbol success / failure determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) matches any of “101” to “105” which are the small hit determination values (FIG. 8A). See). If it is determined that it is not “small hit” (NO in S1305), a missing symbol is determined (S1308), and the process ends. That is, when the result of the determination (S1303, S1309) is neither “big hit” nor “small hit”, the result is “miss”. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the small hit determination (S1305) is “small hit” (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the small hit flag is turned ON (S1307), and the processing is performed. Finish. In addition, you may provide the random number which determines whether it is a small hit separately from the random number for special symbol success / failure determination.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
In the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), a special figure 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203) after the special figure 2 success / failure determination process (S1202). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a time-short state (whether or not the time-short flag is ON) (S1401). ). As a result, if it is not the time saving state (NO in S1401), that is, if it is a non-time saving state, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S1402). A variation pattern is selected on the basis of a variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state medium jackpot table (the portion corresponding to the non-short-time state and jackpot in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). (S1403). In the present embodiment, the non-time-short state medium big hit table is divided depending on whether the big hit is long hit (15R big hit) or short hit (2R big hit) (see FIG. 9). However, this process is a variation pattern selection process for special figure 2, and there is only a 15R fifth big hit (long hit) in the big win won in the lottery of special figure 2 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, the location referred to in this process is always a location per length, and the variation pattern P1 or P2 is selected. If the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. The non-time-short state medium big hit table need not be divided into a long hit type and a short hit type. This is the same for the short-time state big hit table described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S1402 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1402), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1405). If the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1405), the change is made by referring to the non-time-short state medium-to-small hit table (the portion corresponding to the non-time-short state and the small hit in the change pattern table shown in FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on the pattern random number counter value (S1409). In the small hit during the non-short-time state, the variation pattern P4 is always selected. On the other hand, if the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S1405), it means that the hit is neither big hit nor small hit. In this case, the number of reserved special symbols is “1” or “2”. It is determined whether or not there is (S1406). The reserved number here is the number of memories including the information for which the variation pattern is determined by this processing, so the number of reserved memories is any one of “1” to “4”. If it is determined in S1406 that the number of holdings is “1” or “2” (YES in S1406), the first holding number removal table in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving among the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state and the deviation and the portion corresponding to the number of reserved balls “1, 2” (S1407). Here, any one of the fluctuation patterns P5 to P8 is selected.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1406 that the number of holdings is not “1” or “2”, that is, “3” or “4” (NO in S1406), the second holding number removal table in the non-short-time state (see FIG. 9 is referred to in the non-time-short state and out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 and corresponds to the number of reserved balls “3, 4”), and the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). Select (S1408). In this embodiment, any one of the variation patterns P9 to P12 is selected. Here, the first hold number removal table in the non-time-short state is set to have a higher possibility of selecting a fluctuation pattern of a relatively long variation time than the second hold number removal table. The shortest changeable time (12000 ms) that can be selected is also set to be longer than that of the second reserved number removal table (4000 ms). That is, at the time of detachment, the function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works, and when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is “3” or “4”, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is “ A variation pattern having a short variation time is selected as compared with the case of “1” or “2”.

  If it is determined in S1401 that the gaming state is a short-time state (YES in S1401), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S1410 in FIG. 25). If it is determined that the big hit flag is ON (YES in S1410), the fluctuation pattern is referred to by referring to the short-time state big hit table (the portion corresponding to the short-time state and big hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1411). As described above, this processing is the variation pattern selection processing for the special figure 2, and since there is only the 15R fifth big hit (long hit) in the big win winning in the lottery of the special figure 2 (see FIG. 6). In S1411, the variation pattern P13 or P14 corresponding to the long hit is selected.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S1410 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1410), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1412). If the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1412), the fluctuation pattern random number is referenced with reference to the short / medium state small / medium hit table (the portion corresponding to the short time state and small hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on the counter value (S1416). In the small hit during the short time state, the variation pattern P16 is always selected.

  If it is determined in S1412 that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S1412), that is, if it is off, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special symbols is “1” (S1413). The number of reservations here is the same as described above, and the number of reservations is set to one of “1” to “4”. Then, if it is determined that the number of holdings is “1” (YES in S1413), the third holding number detachment table during the time-saving state (non-time-saving state out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. Referring to (1) ”, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1414). In this embodiment, any one of the variation patterns P17 to P20 is selected. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1413 that the number of holdings is not “1”, that is, the number of holdings is any of “2” to “4” (NO in S1413), the table for removing the fourth holding number in the short-time state. (Refer to the portion of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that is in the short-time state, out of sync and the number of reserved balls “2 to 4”), based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) Is selected (S1415). Here, any one of the variation patterns P21 to P24 is selected.

  As described above, in the variation pattern table during the short-time state (the portion corresponding to the short-time state in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the shortening variation function according to the number of retained balls at the time of detachment is the number of retained balls “2”. ”To“ 4 ”. In addition, when winning a long hit out of the big hits, it is easier to select a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than in the non-time-short state. That is, the variation pattern table in the short-time state is a table in which the average value of the variation time of the special symbol is shorter than that in the non-time-short state. As a result, in the time-short state, the speed of digesting the special figure is increased compared to the non-time-short state (normal state) (the game during the time-shortening progresses quickly).

  After the variation pattern is selected as described above, other processing (S1404) shown in FIG. 24 is performed, and this processing is completed. In other processing (S1404), processing such as setting a variation pattern designation command (variation pattern designation command corresponding to FIG. 2) corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the output buffer of the RAM is performed. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit is set to one lower level (for example, when the second special figure reservation storage unit is composed of an address space corresponding to addresses “0000” to “0003”, the address Shift to “0000” side (S1502). Then, “0” is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure hold storage unit, that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth special figure hold (when stored up to the upper limit number). Is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this process ends.

  After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) in the special symbol standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2" and a fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the fluctuation display of the second special symbol.

  Further, in the special symbol standby process (S1102) of FIG. 22, when the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “0” and the special figure 1 reserved ball number is not “0” (YES in S1201, YES in S1206). NO), special figure 1 hit / fail judgment process (S1207), special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Fail Decision Processing]
As shown in FIG. 27, in the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1207), the processes (S1601 to S1612) are performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 success / failure determination process (S1202) shown in FIG. Therefore, although detailed description of this process is omitted, since this process is a process related to the special figure 1, in S1601, the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage part of the RAM (that is, the first special figure reservation 1). The special symbol adequacy determination random number counter value (label-TRND-A) stored in the (RAM area corresponding to the individual) is read and processed. Further, in the big hit type determination in S1610, there is a possibility that any of 15R first big hit, 15R second big hit, 15R third big hit and 2R fourth big hit is determined (see FIG. 8B). As shown in the column of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) in FIG. 8B, the distribution ratio for each big hit is 40% for 15R first big hit, 20% for 15R second big hit, and 15R third big hit. Is 30% and 2R 4th big hit is 10%. When it is determined that the big hit type is any one of 15R first big hit, 15R second big hit and 15R third big hit, the long hit flag is turned ON as a big hit flag in S1612. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2R fourth big hit, the short hit flag is turned ON as a big hit flag in S1612.

[Special Figure 1 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208), the process (S1701 to S1720) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1203) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, although detailed description of this process is omitted, since this process is a process related to FIG. 1, if YES in S1702 (FIG. 28) (that is, if the big hit flag is ON), the type of the big hit is further increased. It is determined whether or not it is 15R big hit (any one of 15R first big hit, 15R second big hit, and 15R third big hit) (S1703). If the hit is 15R big hit (long hit) (YES in S1703), refer to the table for 15R big hit during the non-time-short state (the portion corresponding to the non-time-short state and long hit in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1704). Specifically, the variation pattern P1 or P2 is selected.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1703 that it is not 15R big hit (NO in S1703), that is, if it is 2R fourth big hit (short hit), 2R big hit table during non-time-short state (of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value with reference to the non-time-short state and the portion corresponding to the short hit (S1706). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern P3 is selected.

  In this special figure 1 variation pattern selection process, even in the case of YES in S1712 (FIG. 29) (that is, when the big hit flag is ON), the big hit type is 15R big hit (15R first big hit, 15R second big hit) , 15R third big hit) or not (S1713). If it is a 15R big hit (long hit) (YES in S1713), refer to the table for 15R big hit during the short-time state (the portion corresponding to the short-time state and long hit in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1714). Specifically, the variation pattern P13 or P14 is selected.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1713 that it is not a 15R big hit (NO in S1713), that is, if it is a 2R fourth big hit (short hit), the 2R big hit table during the short time state (the shortest time among the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value with reference to the state and the portion corresponding to the short hit (S1715). Specifically, the variation pattern P15 is selected.

  In this special figure 1 variation pattern selection process, after the variation pattern is selected, other processing (S1705, FIG. 28) is performed, and this processing is completed. In the other processing (S1705), a variation pattern designation command (variation pattern designation command corresponding to FIG. 1) corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random Number Shift Processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, in the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure storage unit is shifted to the lower level (S1802). Then, “0” is set in the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit, that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation (when the maximum number is stored). Is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this process ends.

  After the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209) is executed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2" and a fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.

[Special symbol change processing]
As shown in FIG. 31, in the special symbol variation processing (S1104), first, the variation time of the special symbol, that is, the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 described above (see FIG. 9). It is determined whether or not elapses (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the process ends. Thereby, the variable display of the special symbol is continued.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S1903). If it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (S1904), and whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is “0”. Is determined (S1905). If it is determined in S1905 that the probability variation counter is “0”, the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S1906), and the process proceeds to S1907. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S1903), or when it is determined that the probability variation counter is not “0” (NO in S1905), the process proceeds to S1907.

  In addition, when the probability change flag is turned OFF in S1906, a state change command (game state change information) indicating that the gaming state shifts (changes) from the high probability state (probability changing gaming state) to the low probability state (normal gaming state). ) Is included in the change start command for starting the change display of the next special symbol and set in the output buffer of the RAM. In the present embodiment, when the probability variation counter is set in the processing of S2203 described later at the end of the jackpot game, the set value (set value) is set to “100”. When the variation display of the special symbol is performed 100 times without generating a big hit, the value of the probability variation counter becomes “0”. It is also possible to set the state change command as a separate command from the change start command in the output buffer of the RAM (send it to the sub control board).

  In S1907, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON (S1907). If it is determined that the time reduction flag is ON (YES in S1907), the number of times the special symbol is changed during the time reduction state is counted. Subtract 1 from the hour / hour counter value (S1908), determine whether the hour / hour counter value is “0” (S1909), and if it is “0” (YES in S1909), turn the hour / hour flag off. (S1910), the process proceeds to S1911. If it is determined that the time flag is not ON (NO in S1907), or if it is determined that the value of the time counter is not “0” (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911.

  When the short time flag is turned off in S1910, a state change command (game state change information) indicating that the gaming state shifts (changes) from the high base state (short time gaming state) to the low base state (normal gaming state) Then, it is included in the change start command for starting the change display of the next special symbol and set in the output buffer of the RAM. In the present embodiment, when the time-shortage counter is set in the processing of S2208, which will be described later, at the end of the big hit game, the set value (set value) is “100”. If the variation display of the special symbol is performed 100 times without generating a big hit, the value of the hour / hour counter becomes “0”. Even when the gaming state shifts from the short-time gaming state to the normal state, as described above, the state change command is set in the RAM output buffer as a separate command from the change start command (sent to the sub control board). Is possible.

  In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to “3” (S1911). Then, other processing such as stopping the special symbol variation display at a result corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol success / failure determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number is performed (S1912), and this processing is ended.

[Special symbol confirmation processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special symbol confirmation process (S1106), it is first determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S2001). If the big hit flag is ON (YES in S2001), whether the determined big hit type is 15R big hit (any one of 15R first big hit, 15R second big hit, 15 third big hit, and 15R fifth big hit) Is determined (S2002). And if it is 15R big hit (that is, if the long hit flag is ON), a round to be executed during the big hit game (in the mode of opening once per round, one round is from opening to closing of the big prize opening) The value of the round counter that counts the number of times is set to “15”, and as the opening pattern of the big prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35) (see FIG. 6), For big hits, open pattern for 15R first big hit, for 15R second big hit, open pattern for 15R second big hit, for 15R third big hit, for 15R third big hit, for 15R third big hit, for 15R fifth big hit If there is an opening pattern for 15R fifth big hit, an opening pattern for 15R sixth big hit is set for 15R sixth big hit (S2003).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that it is not 15R big hit (that is, if the short hit flag is ON), the big hit type is 2R fourth big hit, so the value of the round counter is set to "2" An opening pattern for 2R fourth big hit (see FIG. 6) is set as the opening pattern of the winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) (S2004).

  After finishing the process of S2003 or S2004, a jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game (S2005). In the present embodiment, as the big hit opening command, the first opening command corresponding to the 15R first big hit, the second opening command corresponding to the 15R second big hit, the third opening command corresponding to the 15R third big hit, 2R fourth There are a total of six types of fourth opening commands corresponding to big hits, fifth opening commands corresponding to 15R fifth big hits, and sixth opening commands corresponding to 15R sixth big hits. In S2005, an opening command is set according to the type of jackpot (starting jackpot) determined this time. When the opening command is set in S2005, the opening period of the jackpot game is started (S2006), and the special figure operation status is set to “4” (S2007).

  When it is determined in S2001 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2001), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S2008). As a result, if the small hit flag is ON (YES in S2008), the value of the small hit release counter that counts the number of releases of the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35) during the small hit game is “2”. And an opening pattern for small hits (see FIG. 6) is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening (second winning opening 35) (S2009). Then, in order to start the small hit game, the small hit opening command is set (S2010), the small hit game opening period is started (S2011), and the special figure operation status is set to “5” (S2012). . If the small hit flag is not ON in S2008 (NO in S2008), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, so the special figure operation status is set to “1” and the process is ended.

  Here, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) transmits the opening command set in S2005 or S2010 to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing by output processing (S201). Then, the sub-control unit 90 that has received the opening command performs a predetermined game effect execution process based on the opening command.

  The opening period is a period that is set before the first opening operation of the big prize opening in the jackpot game is started, and after the change display of the special symbol (direction symbol) is disabled. " Further, the effect executed in the “start period” is also referred to as “start effect (opening effect)”. In the present embodiment, the opening period (opening time) is determined by the type of the jackpot that has been determined and the gaming state when the jackpot has been determined (that is, when the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed) The opening period can be specified by the above-described opening command. Therefore, the sub-control unit 90 that has received the opening command can perform an opening effect based on the jackpot type and opening period specified by the opening command.

  In the above special symbol confirmation process (S1106), the game control microcomputer 81 that executes the process (S2001 to S2012) for changing the game state to the special game state (a state in which the big hit game or the small hit game is executed) It can be said that it functions as “state control means”.

[Special electric equipment processing 1 (big hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 33, in the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108), first, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is ON (S2101). If it is determined that it is ON (YES in S2101), The flag is turned OFF (S2102), and then it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined in S2103 that the time reduction flag is ON (YES in S2103), the time reduction flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2105. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2101 that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S2101), the process proceeds to S2103 without performing the process in S2102, and if it is determined in S2103 that the time reduction flag is not ON (NO in S2103), The process proceeds to S2105 without performing the process in S2104. In other words, during the execution of the big hit game, the low probability state and the non-time-short state are controlled. In the present embodiment, since the low base state is always in the non-time saving state, the low base state is also controlled during the execution of the big hit game.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (S2105). The big hit end flag is a flag that indicates that the opening of the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) is all ended (the big hit game is ended) in the big hit game. If the big hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), it is determined whether or not the big prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35) is being opened (S2106). If it is not open (NO in S2106), whether or not the time (timing) for opening the grand prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35) has been reached, that is, the start time of the round It is determined whether or not (S2107). Here, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the jackpot has passed and the time to start the first round is reached, or the time to start the next round (next opening) after the interval time between rounds has passed. It is determined whether or not. This is determined based on the big winning opening opening pattern set for each jackpot type described above. For example, if it is before the start of the first round, the determination is made based on whether or not it is the timing at which the opening period ends and the first release process of the first round is executed. If the first round has already started, the determination is made based on whether the previous round has ended and the predetermined interval period has ended. The round is also simply referred to as “R” or “round game”.

  If it is determined in S2107 that it is not the start time of the round (NO in S2107), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2107 that it is not the round start time (YES in S2107), whether or not the round to be executed (started) is the first round or the second round, that is, in the V round. It is determined whether or not there is (S2108). This may be determined for each jackpot type using the value of the round counter, or may be determined by providing a round counter that counts the number of rounds to be executed separately. If the round to be executed is not the V round (NO in S2108), that is, if it is any of 3R to 15R, the process proceeds to S2110 without performing the process of S2109, and the release pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot (FIG. 6). The first big prize winning device 31 is operated to open the first big prize winning opening 30 in accordance with (see S2110). On the other hand, if it is determined that the round to be executed is the V round (the first or second round) (YES in S2108), the V validity period setting process (S2109) is performed, and then the process proceeds to S2110 to determine the type of jackpot In order to open the second big prize opening 35 according to the opening pattern corresponding to (see FIG. 6), the second big prize winning device 36 is operated (S2110).

  Further, when opening the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35), that is, when starting a round, a round start command for the corresponding round is set. For example, a round start command capable of specifying a round to be started is set, such as “1R start command” for the start of the first round and “2R start command” for the start of the second round. The set round start command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output process of S201.

  In the V validity period setting process (S2109), during the V round (1 round or 2 rounds in the present embodiment), the second grand prize opening 35 is opened for a few seconds after the second big prize opening 35 is closed. The period for which the detection of the game ball by the sensor 39a is determined to be valid (corresponding to the first period) is set. In this embodiment, a period other than this (including a time when a small hit or a special game is not executed) is a period (corresponding to the second period) in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalid. Is set. Here, it is determined that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is valid because the V flag is turned on based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401 to S2403 of the specific area sensor detection process described later). The determination that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalid means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is detected.

  Here, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a and the V flag is turned ON, the game state display 46 is set to a predetermined display mode, and the game state after the big hit game is in a high probability state. Is notified. Specifically, the game state display 46 is composed of three LEDs “a1a2a3”. In this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state), the display mode is “a1 □ a2 □ a3 □” (for example, □: off, ■: on). In addition, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a in the big hit game and the V flag is turned ON, the display mode of “a1 • a2 • a3 •” is set. When the big hit game ends and the gaming state is set to a high probability state, the display mode is “a1 □ a2 □ a3 □”. In addition, the lighting control timing of the game state indicator 46 is not limited to such timing, and during the big hit game, the display mode of “a1 □ a2 □ a3 □” is maintained even if the game ball passes a specific area. , “A1a2a3” may be displayed at the timing of transition to the high probability state after the big hit game, and “a1 □ a2 □ a3 □” may be displayed at the timing of transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. .

  That is, in the specific area sensor detection process (S208), which will be described later, the V flag is turned ON only when V passage (passing of the game ball to the specific area 39) is detected during the V effective period, and outside the V effective period (V ineffective period). The V flag is not turned ON at the time of V passage detection in the middle). When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON, that is, the gaming state after the big hit game is set to a high probability state (see the gaming state setting process described later). By doing so, the V flag is not turned on based on the passage of V due to an illegal act, that is, it is not illegally set to a high probability state.

  In addition, if there is a V pass in the V round (1R or 2R) of the big hit game, the game state after the big hit game is set to a high probability state, while even if there is a V pass during the small hit game, If the gaming state before the small hit game is in the normal state, the gaming state after the small hit game is also in the normal state. If the gaming state before the small hit game is in the high probability state, the game state after the small hit game ends The gaming state is also a high probability state. That is, the success / failure determination probability is not changed before and after the small hit game.

  In this embodiment, in the V valid period setting process (S2109), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is set to a valid period (first period) regardless of the type of jackpot. As another aspect, in the case of a V non-passing expected jackpot, the first period may not be set in the V round. That is, in the case of a big hit that does not pass V, the V round may be set to the second period. In the big hit game related to the V non-passing big hit, the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 is set to an extremely short time of 0.1 seconds, so that the game ball may enter the second big prize opening 35 Although it is extremely low, if it is set to the second period, the V flag will not be turned ON even if a ball is entered. As a result, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being turned ON illegally or the V flag from being turned ON due to a rare entry. In this embodiment, the first round and the second round are V rounds, and the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is valid in the V round. However, the location of the V round is not limited to this.

  Next, when it is determined in S2106 that the grand prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2106), It is determined whether or not a predetermined maximum number of balls has been reached (10 in this embodiment) (S2111). If the specified number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2111), whether or not the timing (timing) for closing the big prize opening has been reached, that is, a predetermined opening time after the big prize opening is opened (see FIG. 6) It is determined whether or not elapses (S2112). If the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the specified number of balls has been reached (YES in S2111), or when the opening time of the big winning opening has elapsed (YES in S2112), that is, either of the two round end conditions is satisfied. In such a case, the special winning opening (the first large winning opening 30 or the second large winning opening 35) is closed (S2113). Then, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is “0” (S2115). If it is determined that it is not “0” (NO in S2115), the process ends to start the next round. Further, when closing the big prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35), that is, when ending the round, a round end command of the corresponding round is set. For example, a round end command capable of specifying a round to be ended is set, such as “1R end command” for the end of the first round and “2R end command” for the end of the second round. The set round end command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output process of S201. The round end command is transmitted at the end of the round excluding the final round of the big hit game, that is, when it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not “0”. For example, if the number of rounds of jackpot game to be executed is 15R jackpot game, a round end command is transmitted until the end of 14R, but is not transmitted at the end of 15R. This is because, at the end of the final round, an ending command set in the process of S2116 described later is transmitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the round counter is “0” (YES in S2115), a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (S2116), and a jackpot ending effect is started. (S2117). Then, a jackpot end flag is set (S2118), and the process is terminated. If the round counter is long (15R big hit), the big prize opening will be “0” if it is executed 15 times, and if it is short (2R big hit), the big prize opening will be opened twice. When executed, it becomes “0”.

  Also, if it is determined in S2105 that the big hit end flag is ON (YES in S2105), it is determined whether the execution time (ending time) of the big hit ending effect has elapsed since the final round has ended. (S2119) If the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2120), and a game state setting process (S2121) described later is performed. Then, the big hit flag is turned off (S2122), the special figure operation status is set to “1” (S2123), and the process is terminated. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol standby process (S1102) is executed again as the special figure operation process (S207). It can be said that the game control microcomputer 81 that executes the above-described special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) functions as “special game execution means”.

[Game state setting process]
As shown in FIG. 34, in the game state setting process (S2121), it is first determined whether or not the V flag is ON (S2201). The V flag is a flag that is turned on in a specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 36) described later. If the V flag is ON (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), the probability variation counter is set to “100” (S2203), the V flag is turned OFF (S2204), and S2205. Proceed to the process. On the other hand, if the V flag is OFF (NO in S2201), the process proceeds to S2205 without turning on the probability variation flag. That is, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined whether or not to set the gaming state after the big hit game to a high probability state based on whether or not the V flag is ON in this gaming state setting process. .

  In S2205, it is determined whether or not the finished jackpot game (the jackpot game executed this time) is 15R jackpot. If it is determined that it is a 15R big hit (YES in S2205), it is determined whether or not the 15R big hit is a 15R third big hit (S2206). If it is a 15R third big hit (YES in S2206), it remains as it is. If the processing is finished and the 15R third big hit is not found, that is, if any of the 15R first, second and fifth big hits (NO in S2206), the time reduction flag is turned ON (S2207) and the time reduction counter is set to “100”. "Is set (S2208), and the process ends. Here, if the current big hit game is related to the 15R first big hit or the 15R fifth big hit, the game ball passes the specific area 39 (V passing) during the big hit game and the V flag is turned ON. Since this is the case (YES in S2201), the gaming state after the big hit game in this case becomes a highly accurate base state. Also, if this big hit game is related to the 15R second big hit, since V does not pass during the big hit game and the V flag is not ON (NO in S2201), after this big hit game ends The game state becomes a low probability and high base state. Also, if the current big hit game is related to the 15R third big hit, since V does not pass during the big hit game and the V flag is not ON (NO in S2201), after this big hit game ends The game state becomes a low probability low base state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2205 that the finished jackpot game (the jackpot game executed this time) is not 15R jackpot, that is, 2R fourth jackpot (NO in S2205), the game state before the start of this jackpot game, It is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of the 2R fourth big hit is a short-time state (S2209). If it is determined that the gaming state is not a short-time state (NO in S2209), the processing is performed without turning on the short-time flag. Finish. As a result, if the V flag is not turned on in this big hit game (NO in S2201), the gaming state after the big hit game is in a low probability low base state, and the V flag is turned on in this big hit game. If this is the case (YES in S2201), the gaming state after the big hit game is in a highly accurate low base state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2209 that the gaming state at the time of the 2R fourth big hit is the short-time state (YES in S2209), the short-time flag is turned ON (S2207) and “100” is set to the short-time counter. (S2208), and the process ends. As a result, if the V flag is not turned on in this big hit game (NO in S2201), the gaming state after the big hit game is in a low-accuracy base state, and the V flag is turned on in this big hit game. If this is the case (YES in S2201), the gaming state after the big hit game is in a highly accurate and high base state. It can be said that the game control microcomputer 81 that executes the above game state setting process (S2121) functions as “game state control means”. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 that performs the process of turning on the probability variation flag (YES in S2201 → S2202) based on the V flag being ON (V passing) functions as “privilege grant means”. I can say that.

  Note that the high accuracy high base state, the low accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy low base state are any of the following conditions: the special symbol is displayed with 100 fluctuations and the next big hit occurs. Ends when established. In addition, the processing (S2209) for determining whether or not the gaming state before the big hit game related to the 2R fourth big hit is in the short-time state is performed based on the operating states of the short-time function and the high base function before and after the big hit game. This is to make it the same as the state (condition) at the time of occurrence. If these operating states are different in the case of 2R 4 big hit and small win, even if it becomes difficult to recognize which win is based on the open pattern of the big prize opening, This is because, depending on the operating state of the high base function, which hit can be easily determined. This makes it difficult to distinguish the 2R fourth big hit and the small hit by the opening pattern of the big prize opening, and also makes it difficult to discriminate even by the operating state of the subsequent time-shortening function or the high base generating function.

[Special electric equipment processing 2 (small hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), it is first determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second big winning opening 35 is all ended in the small hit game. If the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the second big winning opening 35 is being opened (S2302). If it is not open (NO in S2302), whether or not the time (timing) for opening the grand prize opening (first big prize opening 30 or second big prize opening 35) has been reached, that is, the big prize opening time is reached. It is determined whether or not (S2303). Here, whether or not the opening time of the small hit has passed and the time to start the first opening has been reached, or the time to start the next opening after the interval time between multiple opening times Is determined (S2303). If it is determined in S2303 that it is not the time to open the big prize opening (NO in S2303), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is time to open the big prize opening (YES in S2303), after performing the V invalid period setting process (S2304), the process proceeds to S2305, and the second is made according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6). In order to open the big prize opening 35, the second big prize winning device 36 is operated.

  In the V invalid period setting process (S2304), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalid for several seconds during the opening of the second big prize opening 35 and after the second big prize opening 35 is closed in the small hit game. The period to be determined (second period) is set. In this embodiment, the period other than the period set as the valid period in the above-described V valid period setting process (S2109) is set as the invalid period (second period). Therefore, in this V invalid period setting process, it is confirmed whether it is not the valid period, that is, whether it is set to the invalid period. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the V timer (provided in the RAM of the main control board 80) that measures the elapse of the V effective period is set to “0” (that is, the state without the effective period). To do. If the V timer is not “0”, the V timer is set to “0”. It should be noted that “0” may be set in the V timer, that is, a state without an effective period may be set without confirming whether the V timer is “0” or not. Thus, even if there is a V passage during the small hit game, if the game state before the start of the small hit game is the normal state, the game state after the end of the small hit game does not shift to the high probability state. In the present embodiment, since the period other than the period set as the valid period in the above-described V valid period setting process (S2109) is an invalid period, the process of S2304 may be omitted.

  If it is determined in S2302 that the second big prize opening 35 is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the second big prize opening 35 in this small hit game, that is, the second big prize opening 35 It is determined whether or not the total number of game balls that have entered in the two releases reaches the specified maximum number of balls (10 in this embodiment) (S2306). If the predetermined number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2306), whether or not it is time to close the second big prize opening 35, that is, a predetermined opening time after the second big prize opening 35 is opened (FIG. 6). It is determined whether or not (see) has elapsed (S2307). If the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the number of balls entered into the second big prize opening 35 in the present small hit game has reached the prescribed number of balls entered (YES in S2306), the second big prize winning opening 35 is closed (S2314). ), And shifts to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 has passed (YES in S2307), the second big prize opening 35 is closed (S2308). Then, the value of the small hit release counter is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit release counter is “0” (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that it is not “0” (NO in S2310), the process is terminated as it is to start the next release.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2310 that it is “0” (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end process in S2311. In S2311, as a small hit end process for ending the small hit game, a small hit ending command is set (S2311) and a small hit ending effect is started (S2312). Then, a small hit end flag is set (S2313), and the process ends. The small hit opening counter becomes “0” when the second big winning opening 35 is opened twice.

  In S2301, if the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), since the two releases have ended, it is determined whether or not the small hit ending time has elapsed (S2315), and the ending time If has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned OFF (S2316), the small hit flag is turned OFF (S2317), and the special figure operation status is set to “1”. Set (S2318) and finish the process. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol standby process (S1102) is executed again as the special figure operation process (S207).

  Note that the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are not switched from ON to OFF at the start of the small hit game. Also, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process (S2121, FIG. 36) is not performed. That is, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game. It can be said that the game control microcomputer 81 that executes the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) functions as “small profit special game execution means”.

[Specific area sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a specific area sensor detection process (S208) subsequent to the special figure operation process (S207). As shown in FIG. 36, in the specific area sensor detection process (S208), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401), and when it is determined that there is no detection (NO in S2401) ), The process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2401 that there is a detection (YES in S2401), it is determined whether or not the V is valid (S2402). The V effective period is a period set in the V effective period setting process (S2109) in the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) described above. In this embodiment, the V validity period is set in the first round and the second round in the jackpot game.

  If it is determined in S2402 that the V validity period is in effect (YES in S2402), the V flag is turned ON (S2403), and whether or not the big hit game currently being executed is a 2R big hit (2R fourth big hit). Is determined (S2404). If it is determined that it is not 2R big hit (NO in S2404), that is, if it is 15R big hit, the first V passing command is set (S2405), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that 2R is a big hit (YES in S2404), the second V passing command is set (S2406), and the process ends. The CPU of the main control board 80 transmits this V pass command to the sub control board 90 at a predetermined timing, and the sub control board 90 executes a game effect on the image display device 7 or the like depending on the type of the received V pass command. .

  If it is determined in S2402 that the V valid period is not in effect (NO in S2402), the third V passing command is set without turning on the V flag (S2407), and the process is terminated. The first V passage command is a command for causing the sub control board 90 to perform V passage notification control. On the other hand, the second V passing command and the third V passing command are commands for preventing the sub control board 90 from performing V passing notification control in principle. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a specific area sensor detection process (S208) and a V valid period setting process (S2109), thereby switching the validity / invalidity of the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39. It functions as (specific area state switching means).

[Reserved ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number process (S209) following the specific area sensor detection process (S208). As shown in FIG. 37, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out. (S2501). Next, the data on the number of reserved balls (the number of held balls command for transmitting the information on the number of held balls to the sub-control board 90) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502). The data related to the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command) is output by the output process (S201) in the next interrupt process (S105), and the data related to the number of held balls (the number of reserved balls command) for each interrupt process. To the output buffer (S2502) and output processing (S201) are sequentially performed.

  When the sub-control unit 90 that has received the reserved ball number command determines that the special figure reserved ball number has increased or decreased based on the received held ball number command, the sub-control unit 90 responds to this on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. The display contents of the effect hold display area (first effect hold display area 9c, second effect hold display area 9d) are updated. Specifically, for example, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls increases by 1 from “3” to “4”, the first effect hold 9a corresponding to the increased number of special figure 1 reserved balls “4” is displayed. It is additionally displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c. Further, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls decreases by 1 from “2” to “1” (that is, when the first special figure hold is digested), the left end of the first effect hold display area 9c (special figure 1 hold) The first effect hold 9a displayed in the location corresponding to the number of balls “1” (see FIG. 3) is moved to the variable hold display area 9e (see FIG. 3), and the first effect hold is accordingly accompanied. The first effect hold 9a displayed in the display area 9c is moved (shifted) to the left by one. Furthermore, also regarding the increase / decrease in the number of second special figure hold balls, the display content of the second production hold 9b can be updated in the same manner as the first production hold 9a (first special figure hold).

  For the data of the special figure holding ball number when the special figure holding ball number is added, that is, the data of the special figure holding ball number accompanying the occurrence of the starting pitch (start winning prize), the start pitching command described above is used. It is good also as what sets the reservation ball number command which shows the number of special figure reservation balls after addition or after addition (after start entry) to an output buffer with a start entry command. In addition, for the data on the number of reserved balls when the number of reserved special figure balls is subtracted, that is, the data on the number of special figure reserved balls that accompanies the start of fluctuation of special symbols (digestion of special figure hold), the above-described change start command is used. It is good also as what sets the reservation ball number command which shows the number of special figure reservation balls after inclusion or after subtraction (after special figure reservation digestion) with a change start command to an output buffer.

[Power-off monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S210) subsequent to the reserved ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 38, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601). If there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if there is a power-off signal input (YES in S2601), the current gaming machine state (whether it is probable, whether it is a winning game, the number of held balls, and the number of remaining fluctuations of probability / short time Etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and then the loop process is performed without returning to the interrupt process (FIG. 11).

[Sub control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, timer, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub control board 90 reads out and executes the program of the sub control main process shown in FIG. 39 from the ROM of the sub control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, a CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter reset are performed.

  Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub control board 90. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the RAM contents are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. If the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset. Note that the processing of S4001 to S4003 is executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and is not executed thereafter. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the same process as the power-off monitoring process (S210) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. Then, the data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, data related to presentation control at the time of power interruption such as a power failure is backed up. For this reason, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) at power-on after power-off such as a power failure (power-off recovery), effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed. Will return to the state before the power failure occurred.

  In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. It should be noted that the effect determination random number includes a random effect determination random number for determining the aspect of the effect symbol game effect to be executed (variation effect pattern), a random effect for determining the advance effect (notice effect pattern), There is an effect design random number for determining a design. The random number update method may be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random number, the random number value may be added two by two instead of adding one by one. These effect determination random numbers are acquired at a predetermined timing. As this acquisition timing, for example, when a control signal (start start ball command) for notifying that there has been a start ball has been transmitted from the main control board 80, or control for notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80. For example, when a signal (variation start command) is transmitted, or when a variation effect pattern described later is determined. Further, the storage location of the acquired effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

  When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in an output buffer (also referred to as “sub output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transferred to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control. It transmits to the control board which becomes a corresponding command transmission destination among the boards 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various rendering devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14 and the like) according to the received command. Production (exercise symbol game production, notice production, special game production accompanying the winning game, etc.) is executed. Next, the production control microcomputer 91 permits interruption (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are permitted, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of effect symbols executed on the display screen 7a (effect symbol display area 7b) of the image display device 7, lighting control of various lamps, and operation of the movable decorative member Control, audio output control from a speaker, and the like can be performed.

[Reception interrupt processing]
In the reception interrupt process (S4008), as shown in FIG. 40, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT of the effect control microcomputer 91. It is determined whether or not it has been input to the section (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4102), and the process ends. . This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed whenever an interrupt pulse with a 2 msec period is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 41, in the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). ). Next, lamp data output processing (S4202) for outputting lamp data for causing various electric decoration members such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 to emit light, and driving for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electric drive source). Drive data output processing (S4203) for outputting data is performed. The ramp data and the drive data are created by a 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Finally, watchdog timer processing for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 10 msec cycle is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 42, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, switch state acquisition processing is performed in which the switch data created in the 2 ms timer interrupt processing is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4303), and the switch stored in the switch state acquisition processing Based on the data, switch processing for setting the display content of the display screen 7a is performed (S4304). After that, other processes such as creating the lamp data and driving data described above and updating the random number for determining the effect are executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
As shown in FIG. 43, in the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not a start ball entering command is received from the main control board 80 (S4390). If it is determined (NO in S4390), the process proceeds to S4401, and if it is determined that a start pitching command is received (YES in S4390), the production hold information storage process (S4395) and the hold notice setting process (S4400) are performed. Then, the process proceeds to S4401.

  The production hold information storage process (S4395) is a process for determining various kinds of information (preliminary determination result, jackpot type determination disturbance) included in the start entry command (Special Figure 1 start entry command or Special Figure 2 start entry command) received in S4390. (Game information such as numerical value, fluctuation pattern random number value, etc.) according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of special figure holding balls at the time of sending and receiving the start incoming ball command (at the time of command generation) In the shift memory format, it is stored in a predetermined production hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. As described above, the start-entry command sent from the main control board 80 (see Fig. 1 start-entry command, special Fig. 2 start-entry command) is determined in advance based on the start-entry (see Fig. 13). ) Information related to the result of the prior determination (also referred to as “holding pre-read information”), specifically, the hit information related to the special symbol success / failure determination or the jackpot type information indicating the random number for determining the big hit type, Since variation pattern information indicating the variation pattern random value is included, these pieces of information are stored as effect suspension information.

  For example, if the received start pitch command is a special fig. 1 start pitch command corresponding to the number of reserved balls “4” in FIG. Is stored in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 production hold information storage area as special figure 1 production hold information. The effect hold information (hold prefetch information) stored in this way can be used to execute various effects such as a change effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The contents stored in the production hold information storage area (production hold information) in the sub-control board 90 are stored in the special figure hold storage section (first special figure hold storage section, second special figure) in the main control board (main control section) 80 described above. This is consistent with the stored content (acquired information) of the hold storage unit. From this, it can be said that the production hold information storage area of the sub-control board 90 is also “acquired information storage means”.

  Also, the hold advance notice setting process (S4400) is displayed in the effect hold display area (first effect hold display area 9c, second effect hold display area 9d) or the variable hold display area 9e on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This is a process for making settings related to the notice effect (hold notice effect) performed using the effect hold (first effect hold 9a, second effect hold 9b). Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a hold change advance notice that changes the display form of the effect hold to a display form (notice display form) different from normal as the hold advance notice effect. That is, as the production hold that can be displayed in the production hold display area or the like, there are a plurality of production holds with different display modes. ) And a specific production hold (specific memory display) which is a notice display mode different from the normal display mode. And when special figure hold (1st special figure hold or 2nd special figure hold) is memorize | stored by start ball | bowl, normal production hold is usually displayed as production hold in the production hold display area. By executing the hold notice effect (hold change notice), the specific effect hold is displayed as the effect hold. In the present embodiment, a normal effect hold and a specific effect hold are provided for each of the first effect hold 9a and the second effect hold 9b, and the hold change notice for the first effect hold 9a and the first effect hold It is possible to execute the hold change notice for 9a. Details of the hold notice effect (hold change notice) and the hold notice setting process (S4400) of this embodiment will be described later.

  Next, in S4401, it is determined whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401). If it is determined that a variation start command has been received (YES in S4401), a variation effect start process (described later) ( S4402) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4406. If it is determined that the variation start command has not been received (NO in S4401), the process proceeds to S4406 without performing the variation effect start process. In S4406, it is determined whether or not a variation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4406). If it is determined that a variation stop command has been received (YES in S4406), the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed. The variation production end process for ending is performed (S4407). In the variation effect end process (S4407), a variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the sub output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays the effect symbol 8 that has been variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop effect is displayed, and the variation effect (effect symbol game effect) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4406 that the change stop command has not been received (NO in S4406), the process proceeds to S4408 without performing the change effect end process. The variation effect refers to an effect performed in synchronism with the variation display of the special symbol. Mainly, the variation display of the effect symbol and the accompanying effect (reach effect, character effect, notice effect during change, etc.) Point to.

  Subsequently, in S4408, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game-related command is received from the main control board 80 (S4408). Here, the jackpot game-related command means that the game state controlled by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80) becomes a special game state, and the main control is executed when the jackpot game (round game) is executed in the special game state. It is a command transmitted from the board 80. Specifically, an opening command transmitted at the start of a jackpot game (special game state), a round start command transmitted at the start of a round, a round end command transmitted at the end of a round, and transmitted at the end of a jackpot game Corresponds to the ending command. In S4408, it is determined whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands has been received, and if received (YES in S4408), jackpot game-related effect processing (S4409) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4412 If not received (NO in S4408), the process proceeds to S4412 without performing the big hit game-related effect process (S4409).

  In the jackpot game-related effect process (S4409), for example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command for designating an opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer. If the command is a round start command, a round effect command for designating a round effect corresponding to the round specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer. If the command is an ending command, the jackpot specified based on the command is set. An ending effect command for designating an ending effect corresponding to the type is set in the sub output buffer. When the various effect commands related to the set jackpot are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 immediately responds to the progress status of the jackpot game based on the received command. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an effect related to the jackpot game such as the opening effect or the round effect (a jackpot game effect) is executed.

  Here, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is in the low probability low base state (normal gaming state), that is, in the “left-handed gaming state”, the result of the special symbol success / failure determination becomes a big hit (so-called When the sub-control board 90 receives an opening command related to the “first hit” and the big hit (first hit), a corresponding first hit opening effect command is transmitted to the image control board 100. In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player is required to make a right turn to enter the game ball into the big prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35). An opening effect (also referred to as “first hit opening effect”) including a right-handed instruction notification for instructing is executed. In the first hit opening effect (not shown) of this embodiment, a right-handed instruction notification at the start of a big hit game related to the first hit (also referred to as “first-hit right-handed instruction notification”) is executed. The right hitting instruction notification for the first hit in the present embodiment is a state in which the game ball enters the big winning opening (in this example, the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) located in the right game area 3B. This is done by displaying the drawn moving image at the approximate center of the display screen 7a. As a result, a player who has made a left game in the low base state and advanced a game (design variation game) can make a right game in the special game state (big hit game) (a game ball toward the right game area 3B). Can be actively encouraged.

  When the sub-control board 90 receives the round start command (1R start command) of the first round at the start of the first round of the big hit game related to the first hit, the corresponding 1R start effect command is displayed on the image control board. 100. In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the round effect display including the round number display is started (executed), and the big hit game (in the special game state) Display of the right-handed instruction image 71 is started (executed). The right-handed instruction image 71 is continuously displayed even in the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy-high base state (that is, the right-handed game state) after the big hit game relating to the first hit is completed (FIG. 52B). )). Processing for starting display of the right-handed instruction image 71 (right-handed instruction image display processing) will be described later. Note that the right-handed instruction notification by displaying the right-handed instruction image 71 is also referred to as “predetermined instruction notification”.

  Furthermore, a big hit occurs in the high-accuracy high-base state or the low-probability high-base state (that is, the right-handed gaming state) after the big hit game related to the first hit is completed (so-called “continuous change”), and When the sub-control board 90 receives the opening command related to “Chan”, a corresponding continuous opening effect command is transmitted to the image control board 100. In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an opening effect (also referred to as “continuous opening effect”) having a content different from the above-described initial hit opening effect is executed. In the continuous opening effect (not shown), the right hitting instruction notification for the first hit like the first hit opening effect described above, that is, the display of the moving image depicting the game ball entering the big prize opening is executed. Instead, the right-handed instruction image 71 (see FIG. 52B) displayed during the game in the high base state is continuously displayed as it is. This is because the high base state is a “right-handed gaming state” and it is not necessary to change the firing direction of the game ball when executing the big hit game related to the continuous game.

  Returning to FIG. 44, in S4412, it is determined whether or not the first V pass command is received from the main control board 80 (S4412). If it is determined that the first V pass command is received (YES in S4412), the V pass notification is performed. The command is set in the sub output buffer (4413), and the process proceeds to S4414. The first V passing command indicates that the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V effective period in the big hit game related to the V pass scheduled big hit (15R first big hit, 15R fifth big hit) ) From the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. When the V passing notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit) or the like in the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 reads predetermined image information from the ROM of the image control board 100. Then, characters such as “V passing!” Are displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. As a result, the player is notified that the game ball has passed through the specific area 39 and that the gaming state after the big hit game is in a high probability state. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4412 that the first V-pass command has not been received (NO in S4412), the process proceeds to S4414 without setting the V-pass notification command.

  Note that displaying the letter “V passing!” Is one of the V passing notification modes, but other display contents (for example, an object image imitating the letter “V”) or “probability GET” are displayed. Or the like may be displayed, etc.). This makes it possible to notify the player that the gaming state after the big hit game (special game) being executed is in a high probability state.

  Subsequently, in S4414, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the second V pass command (set in S2406) is received from the main control board 80 (S4413), and determines that the second V pass command is not received. If so (NO in S4414), the process proceeds to S4415, and it is determined whether a third V passing command is received (S4415). Then, in both cases of determining that the second V passing command is received in S4414 (YES in S4414) and determining that the third V passing command is received in S4415 (YES in S4415), V passing is not notified. The command is set in the sub output buffer (S4416), and the process proceeds to S4417. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4415 that the third V-pass command has not been received (NO in S4415), the process proceeds to S4417 without setting the V-pass non-notification command.

  Here, the second V passing command is a command for notifying the sub control board 90 from the main control board 80 that the specific area sensor 39a has detected the game ball during the V effective period in the 2R fourth big hit. The third V passing command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 from the main control board 80 that the specific area sensor 39a has detected the game ball during the V invalid period such as small hit.

  When the V passing non-notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 or the like in the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays V such as “V passing!” On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Display control is performed on a screen that does not display a character indicating that it has passed (that is, a screen that has no V passing notification). In other words, the V passage non-notification mode is set. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 at the 2R fourth big hit or the small hit, this is not notified to the player.

  Note that the command set in the above-described specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 36) may be only the first V pass command, and the second V pass command and the third V pass command may not be set. In this case, in the received command analysis process (S4302), the above-described S4414 to S4416 are not executed. Even if comprised in this way, it can be set as the pachinko gaming machine which is notified to the player only when V passes during the V effective period of the expected V passing big hit. That is, when the effect for notifying V passage is not given, it is not necessary to set a command (V passage non-notification command). However, the stability of the image control can be increased by setting a command and controlling the image control board 100 based on the command as in this embodiment.

  Finally, the process of S4417 is performed, and this process ends. In S4417, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, a normal symbol variation start command and a normal symbol variation stop command) excluding the various commands described above is performed (S4417).

[Hold notice setting process]
Next, the hold notice setting process (S4400) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, the effect hold (first effect hold display region 9c, second effect hold display region 9d) and the change hold display region 9e displayed on the display screen 7a (the first effect hold display region 9c). It is possible to perform a hold notice effect (hold change notice in this example) using the 1 effect hold 9a and the second effect hold 9b). The hold notice setting process (S4400) is a process for determining whether or not to execute the hold notice effect and selecting / setting an execution pattern (hold notice effect pattern) for execution.

  As shown in FIG. 45, in the hold advance notice setting process (S4400), it is first determined whether or not the current gaming state is a low base state (S4451). This determination can be made based on, for example, a mode status (see FIG. 46) referred to in S4503 described later. As will be described in detail later, the mode status referred to in S4503 indicates the current effect mode. In this embodiment, the effect modes A, D, and E are selected from the five effect modes A to E. It is executed when the gaming state is controlled to the low base state, and the rendering modes B and C are executed when the gaming state is controlled to the high base state. In accordance with this, in S4451, the current performance mode is specified with reference to the mode status, and based on this, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the low base state or the high base state.

  When it is determined in S4451 that the current gaming state is the low base state (YES in S4451), it is determined whether or not the start ball command received in the previous S4390 is a special figure 1 start ball command. (S4452), if it is not a special figure 1 start entry command (NO in S4452), this process is finished without performing the processing after S4454. If it is a special figure 1 start entry command (YES in S4452), S4454 Proceed to Also, if it is determined in S4451 that the current gaming state is not the low base state (NO in S4451), that is, if the current gaming state is the high base state, the start pitch command received in the previous S4390 is It is determined whether or not it is a special figure 2 start entry command (S4453), and if it is not a special figure 2 start entry command (NO in S4453), this process is terminated without performing the processes after S4454. If it is a 2 start entry command (YES in S4453), the process proceeds to S4454.

  Here, the low base state is a game state (left-handed game state) in which the game is advanced by left-handed, and is a game state in which mainly the display of variation of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first start port 20 is advanced. is there. Therefore, when the start ball entering command received in the low base state is not the special figure 1 start ball entering command, that is, the special figure 2 start ball entering command (NO in S4452), the start ball entering is in the low base state. Then, it is the entrance to the 2nd start opening 21 with low possibility of generating normally, and it can be said that it is an irregular (exceptional) start entrance. Further, the high base state is a game state (right-handed game state) in which the game is advanced by right-handed, and is a game state in which mainly the display of variation of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second start port 21 is advanced. . Accordingly, when the start ball entering command received in the high base state is not the special figure 2 start ball entering command, that is, the special figure 1 start ball entering command (NO in S4452), the start ball entering is in the high base state. In this case, the ball enters the first starting port 20 that is unlikely to occur normally, and it can be said that it is an irregular (exceptional) starting ball. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the holding notice effect for the special figure holding based on the irregular (exceptional) starting entry that does not match such a gaming state from being performed, S4452 and S4453 It is supposed to be processed. Note that the pre-determination related to special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 pre-determination) is high for not performing the hold notice effect based on the reception of the special figure 1 start entry command in the high base state (NO in S4453). This is consistent with the above-described start-and-coming process (S205), which is not performed in the base state but performed in the low base state.

  Next, in S4454, execution determination of the hold notice effect is performed (S4454). This execution determination is performed based on whether or not a condition (execution condition) for enabling the hold notice effect is satisfied. In this embodiment, two conditions are provided as execution conditions for the hold notice effect, and one of them is that the current start entry command reception (start entry) does not occur during the hold notice prohibition period. It is stipulated. As will be described in detail later, in the variation display (variation representation) of the effect symbol 8 accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, various effects can be executed to increase the player's expectation for the big hit, A typical example of this is reach production. The reach effect is, for example, an aspect in which the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same (horizontal) as the display pattern of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol success / failure determination indicates that it is a big hit In the case of having a (big hit mode, specific mode), two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) with the symbols constituting the big hit mode, and the remaining one varies. This is an effect indicating whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol that completes the big hit mode in a state where the display is continued.

  The reach production of the present embodiment is roughly divided into a normal reach production and a super reach production, and the latter has a higher expectation level (hit reliability) than the former. In this embodiment, the super reach production is executed when a special symbol fluctuation display (see FIG. 9) with a fluctuation time of 450,000 ms or more is performed, and the fluctuation display is out of fluctuation. In some cases, there are also cases of big hit fluctuations. When such a super reach production with a relatively long variation time (production time) is performed, but the super reach production is due to an out-of-fluctuation variation and the out-of-game symbol is finally displayed. In the case of a player, it is considered that the discouragement is greater than the case where the come-off is confirmed without the reach effect or the case where the come-off is confirmed through the normal reach effect. Therefore, if a hold notice effect is performed for a special figure hold that corresponds to a deviation change (also referred to as a “displacement super reach change”) for which a super reach effect will be performed, the failure that was the subject of the hold notice effect The execution of a new hold notice effect is prohibited for a predetermined period after the super reach change is completed. If the player is disappointed after the super-reach effect, the player who is disappointed with the expectation of the hold notice will easily receive an impression that the expectation of the hold notice will be betrayed, and the interest in the hold notice effect will decrease. This is because even if a new hold notice effect is immediately executed under such circumstances, there is a low possibility that a sufficient effect will be obtained.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a subtraction counter (also referred to as a “limit counter”) that counts the number of fluctuations after the outlier super-reach fluctuation, which is the target of the hold notice effect, ends. It is provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90), and until the limit counter counts a predetermined number of times (until the count value becomes “0”), a suspension notice prohibition period for prohibiting execution of a new suspension notice effect. Yes. The effect control microcomputer 91 sets a predetermined value (predetermined number of times) in the limit counter, triggered by the setting of the execution pattern of the pending notice effect (S4456, which will be described later) targeted for deviation superreach fluctuation. In addition, when the production control microcomputer 91 sets a predetermined value in the limit counter, the fluctuation display of the special design (production design 8) is performed after the detachment super reach fluctuation that triggered the setting of the predetermined value is completed. Each time it is received (for example, every time a change stop command is received), the value of the limit counter is decremented by one.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined value (predetermined number of times) set in the limit counter is set to a value (variable value) corresponding to the fluctuation time of the outlier super reach fluctuation. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the outlier super reach fluctuation is 45000 ms, it is “10”, and when it is 75000 ms, it is “20”. As a result, if the fluctuation time of the deviation super reach fluctuation that is the target of the hold notice effect is 45000 ms, a new hold notice effect is performed while the change display is performed at least 10 times after the change ends. In the case of 75000 ms, the hold notice effect is not performed while the change display is performed at least 20 times after the end of the change. The reason why the number of times varies depending on the length of the variation time is that the variation production with a long variation time (direction time) is generally considered to be a production with a high jackpot reliability. This is because it is considered that the discouragement given to the player becomes larger when the deviation is confirmed with a higher variation effect.

  The determination of the type of the variation pattern (variation time) related to the special figure suspension when setting the limit counter (setting the suspension advance notice prohibition period) is performed by the variation pattern variation included in the start entry command from the main control board 80. It is possible to carry out based on information indicating a numerical value (a value of a fluctuation pattern random number acquired at the time of starting and entering). Further, the value (the length of the hold notice prohibition period) set in the limit counter is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined. Furthermore, the suspension notice prohibition period can be determined based on conditions suitable for setting the period, such as the passage of time and the number of executions of the predetermined effect, in addition to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (effect symbol). Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a big hit is made during the suspension notice prohibition period (when the limit counter> 0), the limit counter is reset (initialized) triggered by the execution of the big hit game related to the big hit. .

  In S4454, referring to the above limit counter, it is determined whether or not the reception of the current start-in-ball command (start-in ball) is during the hold notice prohibition period, that is, the hold notice prohibition period is currently in effect. It is determined whether or not. As a result, if it is during the hold notice prohibition period, the execution condition of the hold notice effect is not satisfied (not established) (NO in S4455), and this process is terminated without performing the processes after S4456. In this case, the hold notice effect based on the current start entry is not executed. On the other hand, if it is not currently in the hold notice prohibition period, in S4454, a hold notice effect execution lottery is further performed. That is, the execution condition for the hold notice effect is determined not to be during the hold notice prohibition period (first condition), but to win the execution notice for the hold notice effect (second condition).

  In this embodiment, as a random number for determining the effect, a random number for determining the holding notice effect execution is provided, the random number is acquired in S4454, and the acquired random number value is determined based on a lottery table (not shown). An execution lottery (random lottery) of the hold notice effect is performed. The lottery table (not shown) used in the lottery includes, for example, information on whether or not a new special figure is held on the occasion of the current start entry (big hit, small hit or miss) and fluctuation pattern information (long and short fluctuation time) ) (That is, according to the result of prior determination), the execution possibility of the hold notice effect, that is, the winning probability is determined to be different. Specifically, for example, when a newly generated (stored) special figure hold is a hold associated with 15R big hit (long hit) (15R big hit hold), it is a miss, small hit or short hit (2R big hit) ) Is determined so as to increase the possibility of execution of the hold notice effect. In addition, when the newly generated (stored) special figure hold is a hold related to a change pattern with a relatively long change time (for example, 45000 ms or more), a change pattern with a relatively short change time (for example, 45000 ms or more) It is determined that the hold notice effect is more likely to be executed than when the hold is related to 30000 ms or less.

  Then, if it is lost in the execution lottery of the hold notice effect, the execution process condition of the hold notice effect is not satisfied (not established) (NO in S4455), and this process ends without performing the processes after S4456. In this case, the holding notice effect based on the current start entry is not executed (started). On the other hand, when the lottery for the holding notice effect is won, all the conditions for executing the holding notice effect are satisfied. In this case, the execution condition for the holding notice effect is satisfied (YES in S4455), The execution pattern (holding notice effect pattern) of the hold notice effect is determined (selected) and set (S4456).

  Note that the special figure hold that fulfilled the execution condition of the hold notice effect and that triggered the execution of the hold notice effect is also referred to as “notice target hold”, and the acquisition information related to the notice subject hold is “notice target acquisition information”. Also called. In addition, the execution conditions of the above-described holding notice effect are merely examples, and it is of course possible to set conditions other than the above-described conditions, and the number (type) of conditions is arbitrary. Furthermore, it is possible to vary the execution conditions of the hold notice effect depending on the gaming state (low base state, high base state, etc.).

  The determination (selection) and setting of the execution pattern (holding notice effect pattern) of the hold notice effect in S4456 is performed by using the hold notice effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48 or 49, and the hold notice effect determining random number acquired in S4456. Based on. The random number for determining the reserved notice effect is a kind of random number for determining the notice effect described above, and takes a value in the range of “0 to 99” in the present embodiment. If the current gaming state is the low base state (YES in S4451) and the currently received start ball command is the special figure 1 start ball command (YES in S4452), the special figure 1 hold notice effect shown in FIG. Using (referring to) one of the pattern determination tables A to C, the execution pattern of the special figure 1 hold notice effect is determined (selected). On the other hand, if the current gaming state is the high base state (NO in S4451) and the currently received start ball entering command is the special figure 2 start ball entering command (YES in S4453), the special figure 2 hold shown in FIG. Using (referring to) any one of the notice effect pattern determination tables A to D, the execution pattern of the special figure 2 reservation notice effect is determined (selected).

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, a special figure 1 reservation notice effect pattern determination table (also simply referred to as “special figure 1 reservation notice table”) and a special figure 2 reservation notice effect pattern determination table (simply “special figure 2 reservation”). The “preliminary notice table” is common in that both tables A to C are provided, and the special figure 2 reserved advance notice table is different from the special figure 1 reserved advance notice table in that the table D is not present. ing. All of these tables can be specified based on the start pitching command received in the previous S4390 and the production suspension information stored in the previous S4395 (that is, the pre-determination result). Random value (0 to 0) for determining the hold notice effect for each of “exit, small hit, big hit”, “reach presence / absence in case of deviation” (variation time) and “big hit type in case of big hit” (short hit, long hit) 99) is assigned to one of a plurality of selectable pending notice effect patterns.

  48 and the special figure 2 reservation notice tables A to C shown in FIG. 49, the special figure 2 reservation notice tables A to C have “short hit” (2R big hit). The data structure is the same except that there is no jackpot type of), and the type and number of hold notice effect patterns that can be selected and the distribution ratio of random numbers for determining the hold notice effect (number of random value assignments) ) Is the same. The reason why there is no “short hit” (2R jackpot) jackpot type in the special figure 2 reservation notice table is that “2R jackpot” is not provided as a jackpot type related to the special figure 2 (FIG. 6, FIG. 6). 8). On the other hand, for the special figure 2 reservation notice table D shown in FIG. 49, other reservation notice effect patterns that are not selected in other reservation notice tables can be selected (selected). In the tables shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, “-” indicates that no random number value for holding notice effect determination is assigned, and this part is not a selection target (not selected).

  Specifically, the types of special figure 1 hold notice effect patterns that can be selected in the special figure 1 hold notice table (also referred to as “special figure 1 hold notice type”) can be broadly classified. It is divided into three types. Special figure 1 hold notice type A is constituted by a hold notice effect pattern that can be selected based on special figure 1 hold notice table A shown in FIG. 48 (a), and in this embodiment, "patterns A1 to A4" are used. Composed. Further, the special figure 1 hold notice type B is constituted by a hold notice effect pattern that can be selected based on the special figure 1 hold notice table B shown in FIG. 48 (b). In this embodiment, “patterns B1 to B4” are used. Is comprised. Further, the special figure 1 hold notice type C is constituted by a hold notice effect pattern that can be selected based on the special figure 1 hold notice table C shown in FIG. 48 (c). In this embodiment, “patterns C1 to C7” are used. Is comprised.

  On the other hand, the types of special figure 2 hold notice effect patterns (also referred to as “special figure 2 hold notice types”) that can be selected in the special figure 2 hold notice table are roughly classified into four special notice 2 hold notice types A to D. Divided into types. The special figure 2 reservation notice type A is constituted by a reservation notice effect pattern that can be selected based on the special figure 2 reservation notice table A shown in FIG. 49 (a). Composed. Further, the special figure 2 reservation notice type B is constituted by a reservation notice effect pattern that can be selected based on the special figure 2 reservation notice table B shown in FIG. 49 (b). In this embodiment, “patterns B1 to B4” are selected. Is comprised. Further, the special figure 2 reservation notice type C is constituted by a hold notice effect pattern that can be selected based on the special figure 2 reservation notice table C shown in FIG. 49 (c). Is comprised. Further, the special figure 2 reservation notice type D is constituted by a hold notice effect pattern that can be selected based on the special figure 2 reservation notice table D shown in FIG. 49 (d). Is comprised.

  When the special figure 1 hold notice effect is executed (YES in S4452 → YES in S4454 → YES in S4455), one of the special figure 1 hold notice tables A to C shown in FIGS. 48 (a) to 48 (c) is set in S4456. Then, based on the set table and the random number value for determining the hold notice effect obtained in S4456, one special figure 1 hold notice effect pattern is selected and set (S4456). Which of the special figure 1 reservation notice tables A to C is set (used) depends on whether the number of special figure 1 reservation balls after the increase by 1 with the occurrence of the first start ball is “1” or “2”. It depends on whether this is the case. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is “1”, the special figure 1 reservation notice table A is set. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is “2” or more, the special figure 1 reservation notice table B or C is set. set. Therefore, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls becomes “1” by the first start entry, and the special figure 1 reservation notice effect is performed accordingly, the reservation notice effect pattern is any one of “patterns A1 to A4”. One pattern (S4456). On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 becomes “2” or more due to the first start entry, and the special figure 1 holding notice effect is performed accordingly, the holding notice effect patterns are “patterns B1 to B4” and “pattern C1”. To C7 "(S4456).

  Here, when the special figure 1 holding ball number is “2” or more, which of the special figure 1 holding notice tables B and C is set (used) is determined by, for example, the sub-control board 90 (the microcomputer for effect control). 91) and can be determined according to a predetermined order of use (alternately, alternate every predetermined number of times). In this example, it is determined by random number lottery. I am going to do it.

  When executing the special figure 2 reservation notice (YES at S4453 → YES at S4454 → YES at S4455), any one of the special figure 2 reservation notice tables A to D shown in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (d) is obtained at S4456. Based on the set table and the random number value for determining the hold notice effect obtained in S4456, one special figure 2 hold notice effect pattern is selected and set (S4456). Which of the special figure 2 reservation notice tables A to D is set (used) depends on whether the number of special figure 2 reservation balls after the increase by 1 with the occurrence of the second start entry is "1" or "2" It depends on whether this is the case. When the special figure 2 reserve ball number is “1”, the special figure 2 hold notice table A or D is set, and when the special figure 2 hold ball number is “2” or more, the special figure 2 hold notice table B˜ Set one of D. Therefore, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls becomes “1” due to the second start entry, and special figure 2 reservation notice effect is performed accordingly, the reservation notice effect patterns are “patterns A1 to A4” and “patterns D1 to D1”. The pattern is any one of “D5” (S4456). On the other hand, when the number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls becomes “2” or more due to the second starting entry, and the special figure 2 reserved notice effect is performed accordingly, the reserved notice effect patterns are “patterns B1 to B4”, “pattern C1”. To C7 "and" Pattern D1 to D5 "(S4456).

  Here, when the special figure 2 holding ball number is “1”, which of the special figure 2 holding notice tables A and D is set (used), or the special figure 2 holding ball number is “2” or more. In some cases, which of the special figure 2 reservation notice tables B to D is to be set (used) is determined, for example, by random lottery using a table selection random number generated by the sub-control board 90 (production control microcomputer 91). Or in accordance with a predetermined order of use (alternating, alternating every predetermined number of times). In this example, it is determined by random number lottery.

  Next, in S4457, a hold notice effect command for instructing execution of the hold notice effect pattern set in S4456 is set in the sub output buffer (S4457). When the hold notice effect command set in S4457 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 specifies a hold notice effect pattern specified based on the received hold notice effect command, That is, the image data for the reserved notice effect (effect reserved image data or the like) corresponding to the reserved notice effect pattern set in S4456 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the reserved notice effect (hold change) by the read image data. The notice is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (effect hold display area, variable hold display area) according to the hold notice effect pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable display of the effect symbol 8 (special symbol) until the notice target hold that triggers the execution (start) of the hold notification effect (for example, a change effect start command). For each reception, display control for effect hold such as moving the display position of effect hold or changing the display mode of effect hold is executed according to the hold notice effect pattern.

  The hold notice effect of the present embodiment realized by the above hold notice setting process (S4400) will be described. First, regarding the first effect hold 9a (first hold symbol) corresponding to the first special hold, the normal (default) first effect hold 9a in which the hold notice effect is not performed is as shown in FIG. 50 (a). In addition, the display color is a “white” circular pattern. The first effect hold 9a is a first effect hold display area 9c on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 by increasing the number of special figure 1 hold balls based on the game balls entering the first start port 20. Is additionally displayed. On the other hand, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (digestion of the first special figure hold), among the first effect hold 9a displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c, the first storage order is the oldest The first effect hold 9a corresponding to the special drawing hold (in this example, the first effect hold 9a displayed at the left end of the first effect hold display area 9c) is moved and displayed in the variable hold display area 9e, and accordingly The other first effect hold 9a displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c is moved and displayed (shifted display) on the left side (see FIG. 50A). The effect hold displayed in the change hold display area 9e corresponds to the special symbol (also referred to as “the change”) in the change display which has been newly started to be changed, and the change display related to the change ends. It is erased from the display screen 7a (variable hold display area 9e) at a predetermined time before starting. This erasure can be performed, for example, based on the establishment of the display stop condition for effect suspension in the above-described variable suspension display area 9e.

  On the other hand, when the hold notice effect (the special figure 1 hold notice effect) using the first effect hold 9a is performed, the display color of the first effect hold 9a is the normal color (white in this example). It changes to a different predetermined notice color (notice display mode). Depending on the display color of the first production hold 9a displayed in the notice display mode, there is a possibility that the display result of the variable display based on the corresponding first special figure hold (the notice target hold) will be a big hit (specific display result). It has been suggested. In the special figure 1 hold notice effect of the present embodiment, the display color of the first effect hold 9a is any one of four colors from “white” to “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “gold”. It is changed and displayed. And among the four colors of the notice color (notice display mode), “gold” is the one with the highest jackpot reliability, and in the following, the jackpot reliability decreases in the order of “red”, “green” and “blue”. I am doing so. In the present embodiment, such a jackpot reliability notice (holding change notice) due to the change in display color of the effect on hold is executed as the on hold notice effect, and this point uses the second effect hold 9b. The hold notice effect (Special Figure 2 hold notice effect) is also common.

  Among the special figure 1 hold notice effect patterns, “patterns A1 to A4” (special figure 1 hold notice type A) and “patterns B1 to B4” (special figure 1 hold notice type B) are both newly started first. When displaying (additional display) the first production hold 9a corresponding to the first production hold 9a based on the occurrence of the entry (holding for advance notice) in the first production hold display area 9c, the display mode is set to normal (in this example, “ It is a pattern in which the display mode is changed until the notice target hold is digested, while changing to any one of “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “golden” different from “white”) . In other words, the special figure 1 hold notice type A and B are both "hold change notice at start-up". In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B, the pattern for displaying the first effect hold 9a in “blue” is “pattern A1, B1”, and the first effect hold 9a is “green”. "Pattern A2, B2", the first effect hold 9a is displayed in "red", the pattern is "pattern A3, B3", and the first effect hold 9a is displayed in "gold" The pattern is “pattern A4, B4”.

  With special figure 1 hold notice type A (patterns A1 to A4) and special figure 1 hold notice type B (patterns B1 to B4), the hold notice effect (hold change) based on the individual hold notice effect patterns constituting each notice type ) (Execution mode and display mode) are the same. Specifically, for example, the first start entry occurs and the number of special figure 1 held balls becomes “1”, and accordingly, the special figure 1 holding notice effect is the pattern A1 (special figure 1 holding notice type A). When executed, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the first effect hold 9 a is “at the position corresponding to the special figure 1 hold ball number“ 1 ”in the first effect hold display area 9 c (here, the left end). Displayed in “blue”. The display of the effect on hold with the notice color (here “blue”) accompanying the start ball entry means the occurrence (start) of the on hold notice effect (the same applies hereinafter). Then, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first effect hold 9a (digestion of the notice target hold), the “blue” first effect hold 9a changes from the first effect hold display area 9c as it is. The display is moved to the hold display area 9e (see the lower column of FIG. 50B). In addition, for example, the first start entry occurs and the special figure 1 holding ball number becomes “3”, and accordingly, the special figure 1 holding notice effect is executed with the pattern B1 (special figure 1 holding notice type B). 50 (c), the first effect on hold at the position corresponding to the special figure 1 hold ball number “3” in the first effect hold display area 9c (here, the third position from the left end). 9a is displayed in “blue”. Thereafter, while the two first special figure reservations that occurred before the “blue” first effect hold 9a are digested, the display mode of the “blue” first effect hold 9a remains unchanged. The position only moves (shifts). As the notice target hold is consumed, the “blue” first effect hold 9a corresponding to the notice target hold moves from the first effect hold display area 9c to the variable hold display area 9e and is displayed (FIG. 5). 50 (c), see below).

  Further, among the special figure 1 hold notice effect patterns, “patterns C1 to C7” (special figure 1 hold notice type C) are newly generated (acquired) based on the notice object hold based on the first start entry. When displaying (additional display) one effect hold 9a in the first effect hold display area 9c, the display mode is the normal “white” or the notice display modes “blue”, “green”, and “red” The display mode is a color ("blue", "green", "red") that indicates that the jackpot reliability is higher than the original, before the notice target suspension is completed. Or “golden”). In other words, the special figure 1 reservation notice type C is “a start change and / or digestion hold change notice”. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48 (c), the pattern that is changed to “blue” after the first rendering suspension 9a is initially displayed in “white” is “pattern C1”. A pattern that is initially displayed in “white” and then changed to “green” is “pattern C2”, and a pattern that is first displayed in “white” and then changed to “red” is “pattern C3”. The pattern in which the first effect hold 9a is initially displayed in “blue” and then changed to “green” is “pattern C4”, and the first effect hold 9a is initially displayed in “blue” and then changed to “red” The pattern to be changed is “Pattern C5”, the pattern that is changed to “Red” after the first effect hold 9a is initially displayed in “green” is “Pattern C6”, and the first effect hold 9 It is set to "pattern C7" a pattern to be changed to "gold" after viewing the in the original "red".

  Specifically, for example, the first start entry occurs and the number of special figure 1 reservation balls becomes “3”, and accordingly, the special figure 1 reservation notice effect is a pattern C5 (special figure 1 reservation notice type C). When executed, as shown in FIG. 50 (d), the first effect hold 9a is displayed in "blue" at a position corresponding to the special figure 1 hold ball number "3" in the first effect hold display area 9c. The Thereafter, the display color of the first production hold 9a changes from “blue” to “red” until the two first special figure hold generated before the “blue” first production hold 9a is digested. . That is, the display color of the first effect hold 9a changes from “blue” to “red” in the first effect hold display area 9c (see the middle column in FIG. 50D). As the notice target hold is consumed, the “red” first effect hold 9a corresponding to the notice target hold is moved from the first effect hold display area 9c to the variable hold display area 9e for display (FIG. 5). 50 (d), see below). Note that the change timing (timing) when the display color of the on-hold display changes in the on-screen display area is set in advance in the on-hold notice effect pattern, or under the control of the display control microcomputer 91 or the image control microcomputer 101. Can be determined each time (and so on).

  When executing the special figure 1 hold notice effect, the special figure 1 hold notice effect pattern described above is based on one of the special figure 1 hold notice tables A to C shown in FIGS. Either one is selected, but in each table, the pattern in which the display color of the first effect hold 9a is “golden” indicates that the prior determination result (hold prefetch result) related to the notice target hold is 15R big hit (long It can be selected only when it is hit. That is, the patterns A4, B4, and C7 in which the display color of the first effect hold 9a is “golden” are the big hit decision patterns (15R big hit decision patterns). In each table, for the special figure 1 hold notice effect pattern other than “golden”, the display color of the first effect hold 9a is displayed when the prior determination result related to the notice object hold is 15R big hit (long hit). The selection possibility (selection rate) of the pattern that becomes “red” is higher than other patterns. In the following, the pattern that becomes “green” and the pattern that becomes “blue” can be selected in this order. The nature is low.

  On the other hand, when the preliminary determination result related to the advance notice hold is 2R big hit (short hit), small hit or miss, it is possible to select a pattern in which the display color of the first presentation hold 9a is “blue”, respectively. The selectivity (selectivity) is higher than that of the other patterns. In the following, the possibility of selection becomes lower in the order of the pattern that becomes “green” and the pattern that becomes “red”. In addition, when the preliminary determination result relating to the advance notice hold is “out of reach”, either the pattern in which the display color of the first effect hold 9a is “blue” or the pattern in which “green” is selected is selected. The other patterns are not selected. As a result, among the four colors of the notice color (notice display mode), “gold” is the big hit reliability “100%” (big hit confirmed), and the big hit reliability other than “gold” is the highest in “red”. The big hit reliability is set to decrease in the order of “green” and “blue”.

  It should be noted that both the case where the pre-determined result related to the notice target hold is 2R big hit (short win) (Special Figure 1 hold) and small hit (Special Figure 1 hold, Special Figure 2 hold) are both hits. Nevertheless, as in the case of being out of place, the selection possibility (selection rate) of the pattern that becomes “blue” is set to the highest, and the pattern that becomes “green” and the pattern that becomes “red” are in the following order. The 2R big hit (short hit) and the small hit are hits that you can't expect to get a lot of prize balls for the player. This is because there is almost no.

  Next, regarding the second effect hold 9b (second hold symbol) corresponding to the second special hold, the normal (default) second effect hold 9b in which the hold notice effect is not performed is shown in FIG. 51 (a). In this way, the display color is a “white” triangular design. In addition, the display mode (additional display, movement display, erasure, etc.) of the normal second effect hold 9b accompanying the increase / decrease of the special figure 2 hold ball number is the case of the first effect hold 9a described above (FIG. 50 (a)). The description is omitted.

  Further, regarding the hold notice effect (special figure 2 hold notice effect) using the second effect hold 9b, among the special figure 2 hold notice types A to D, for the special figure 2 hold notice types A to C, the hold notice effect is provided. Type of pattern (type and number of notice colors), execution mode of hold notice effect based on hold notice effect pattern (change mode of display color) and table structure for selecting hold notice effect pattern (for each hold notice effect pattern) Selectability) is the same as that of the special figure 1 hold notice effect types A to C described above (see FIGS. 48 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 49 (a) to (c)). Description of these parts will be omitted.

  On the other hand, regarding the special figure 2 hold notice effect, a part different from the special figure 1 hold notice effect will be described. First, the display mode of the hold notice effect based on the special figure 2 hold notice effect pattern (display mode of the specific memory display) is: This is different from the display mode of the hold notice effect based on the special figure 1 hold notice effect pattern (display mode of the specific memory display). That is, in the special figure 2 hold notice effect of the present embodiment, the display color of the second effect hold 9b is not only the notice color based on the hold notice effect pattern, but also as shown in FIGS. 51 (b) to (d). In addition, a predetermined image is added to the second effect hold 9b and displayed. In the present embodiment, the predetermined image is a smoke image S representing a state in which smoke (smoke) is generated from the second effect suspension 9b. The smoke image S is displayed in the same color as the notice color set as the display color of the second effect hold 9b when executing the special figure 2 hold notice effect (see FIGS. 51B to 51D). reference). For this reason, in the special figure 2 reservation notice effect, the effect reservation with the display color change (specific effect reservation) is displayed in a more conspicuous manner than the special figure 1 reservation notice effect.

  In this way, the display mode (highlighted display mode) of the special figure 2 hold notice effect is more conspicuous than the display mode (specific memory display display mode) of the special figure 1 hold notice effect. The game state when the special figure 2 hold notice effect is executed is the high base state, and in the high base state, the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special symbol is higher than the low base state. As a result, the digestion speed of the second special figure reservation becomes faster than the digestion speed of the first special figure reservation in the low base state. That is, in the special figure 2 hold notice effect, the display period of the second effect hold 9b corresponding to the hold until the notice target hold is consumed is shorter than that in the special figure 1 hold notice effect.

  Further, the special figure 2 hold notice effect pattern includes hold notice effect patterns (patterns D1 to D5) of the special figure 2 hold notice type D that do not exist in the special figure 1 hold notice effect pattern (FIG. 49 (d). )). “Pattern D1 to D5” (special drawing 2 hold notice type D) is a second effect hold display area for the second effect hold 9b related to the notice subject hold newly generated (acquired) based on the second start entry. When displaying in 9d (additional display), the display mode is changed from a normal triangle to a “star” and displayed, and the “star” display mode is maintained until the notice target hold is consumed, An effect display in which lightning is emitted to the star-shaped second effect hold 9b at the timing when the second effect hold 9b moves from the second effect hold display area 9d to the variable hold display area 9e when the notice target hold is digested ( (Display of lightning image G), and accordingly, the display mode of the second effect hold 9b is left as “star” or “blue”, “green”, “red” and “gold”) (See Fig. 51 (e).) ). In other words, the special figure 2 hold notice type D is a hold notice effect by a combination of the “hold change notice at the start of starting ball” and the “variable hold change notice”. In this case, the display of the “star-shaped” effect hold accompanying the start ball entry means the occurrence (start) of the hold notice effect.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49 (d), the pattern for displaying the second effect hold 9b as “star” in both the second effect hold display area 9d and the variable hold display area 9e is “pattern D1”. The second effect hold 9b is displayed as “star” in the second effect hold display area 9d and the pattern displayed as “blue” in the change hold display area 9e is “pattern D2”, and the second effect hold 9b is displayed as “star” in the second effect hold display area 9d and “green” is displayed in the variable hold display area 9e as “pattern D3”, and the second effect hold 9b is displayed as the second effect hold display. The pattern displayed as “star” in the area 9d and displayed as “red” in the variable hold display area 9e is “pattern D4”, and the second effect hold 9b is the second effect. It is set to a pattern to be displayed as a "gold", "pattern D5" in fluctuation hold display region 9e and displays as "star" in distillate display area 9d.

  Specifically, for example, the second start entry occurs and the special figure 2 holding ball number becomes “3”, and accordingly, the special figure 2 holding notice effect is the pattern D4 (special figure 2 holding notice type D). When executed, as shown in FIG. 51 (e), the second effect hold 9b is displayed as a “star” at the position corresponding to the special figure 2 hold ball number “3” in the second effect hold display area 9d. Is done. Thereafter, the second effect reservation 9b is maintained at the “star shape” until the two second special figure reservations generated before the “star-shaped” second effect reservation 9b are consumed. That is, at least in the second effect hold display area 9d, the display mode of the second effect hold 9a is maintained in a “star shape” (see the second from the top in FIG. 51E). Then, as the notice target hold is consumed, the “star-shaped” second effect hold 9b corresponding to the notice target hold moves from the second effect hold display area 9d to the variable hold display area 9e as it is. An effect display (display of lightning image G) in which lightning is released is performed on the “star-shaped” second effect hold 9b displayed in 9e (see the third from the top in FIG. 51 (e)). The star shape is destroyed by the lightning, and the second effect reservation 9b is displayed in a triangle “red” on the change reservation display area 9e (see the fourth from the top in FIG. 51 (e)). In the pattern D1, although the effect display (display of the lightning image G) is performed on the “star-shaped” second effect hold 9b displayed in the variable hold display area 9e, The star shape is maintained without being destroyed.

  When executing the special figure 2 hold notice effect, one of a plurality of special figure 2 hold notice effects patterns based on any of the special figure 2 hold notice tables A to D shown in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (d). Any one of them is selected. Among them, in the special figure 2 reservation notice table D, the pattern in which the display color of the second effect reservation 9b is finally “golden” is the result of the prior determination related to the notice object reservation. Can be selected only when 15R is a big hit (long hit). That is, the pattern D5 in which the display color of the second effect hold 9b is “golden” is a big hit confirmation pattern. Also, in the special figure 2 reservation notice table D, for the patterns D1 to D4 other than “gold”, if the prior determination result related to the notice subject hold is 15R big hit (long hit), the second effect hold 9b The selectability (selection rate) of the pattern D4 whose display color is “red” is higher than other patterns, and hereinafter, the pattern D3 which becomes “green” and the pattern which becomes “blue” The possibility of selection becomes lower in the order of D2, and further, the pattern D1 in which the second effect hold 9b is maintained in a star shape until the end is not selected.

  On the other hand, in the special figure 2 reservation notice table D, when the prior determination result relating to the notice subject hold is a small hit or a reach is out of reach, the display color of the first effect hold 9a is “blue”, respectively. The selectability (selectivity) of the pattern D2 is higher than that of the other patterns. Hereinafter, the selectability of the pattern D3 that becomes “green” and the pattern D4 that becomes “red” is low. It has become. In addition, when the preliminary determination result related to the advance notice hold is “out of reach”, the pattern D1 in which the second effect hold 9b is maintained in a star shape until the end is selected, and the other patterns are not selected. It has become a thing. This pattern D1 is selected only when the preliminary determination result relating to the notice target hold is “disengagement without reach”. That is, the pattern D1 is a so-called “gase” hold notice effect.

  The above is one aspect of the hold notice effect according to the present embodiment, but in this example, during the execution of the hold notice effect, the special figure hold that is digested before the notice target hold that became the execution trigger is a big hit. If, in other words, if a big hit occurs in the state where the production hold is displayed in the notice display mode, the hold notice production is terminated with the occurrence of the big win, and all production hold is not activated during the big hit game. It is configured to display. Then, the effect suspension displayed in the notice display mode until the big hit occurs is displayed in the normal display mode after the big hit game ends. Further, in this embodiment, all of the storage contents (holding prefetch information) in the effect holding information storage area of the sub control board 90 are initialized at the time of occurrence of the big hit. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 initializes the special suspension of the special figure 2 in preference to the special figure 2 suspension because the production hold information storage area is initialized in response to the occurrence of the big hit. This is to ensure the fairness of the game because the suspension priority digest (Special Figure 2 priority fluctuation) is adopted. Note that the production hold information storage area is initialized for all of the special figure 1 production hold information corresponding to the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 production hold information corresponding to the special figure 2 hold as in this embodiment. Or, it is possible to target only the production hold information corresponding to the special figure hold that is not preferentially digested (in this embodiment, the special figure 1 production hold information).

  Here, the production hold (first production hold 9a, second production hold 9b) displayed in the normal display mode (circular white and triangular white in this example) is also referred to as “normal storage display”, and the notice display mode “Specific memory display” refers to the effect hold (first effect hold 9a, second effect hold 9b) displayed in (in this example, four colors of blue, green, red, and gold, star shape, smoke image S, etc.). Also called. Moreover, the hold notice effect (for example, FIG. 50B) in which the display mode of the effect hold displayed in the effect hold display area (first effect hold display area 9c, second effect hold display area 9d) changes to the notice display form. -(D), see FIGS. 51 (b)-(e)) is also referred to as "first notice effect", and the hold notice effect (for example, FIG. 51 (e) is also referred to as “second notice effect”. Further, as an aspect related to the second notice effect, the special figure 1 reservation notice type (an aspect of the hold notice effect in the low base state) in which the second notice effect is not executed is also referred to as a “first form”. Special figure 2 hold notice type (a form of a hold notice effect in a high base state) that can be executed is also referred to as a “second form”. Further, the production suspension displayed in the variable hold display area 9e is also referred to as “corresponding display”, and the variable hold display area 9e is also referred to as “corresponding display means”.

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the variation effect start process (S4402) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described. As shown in FIG. 46, in the variation effect start processing (S4402), first, effect determination random number processing for obtaining various effect determination random numbers such as a random effect determination random number, a notice effect determination random number, an effect symbol determination random number, and the like. (S4501) is performed. In the present embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the change start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value is acquired from each random number. Based on this acquired value (acquired information), the aspect of the effect symbol game effect to be executed (variation effect), the notice effect, the effect symbol to be stopped and the like are determined.

  Next, in S4502, the received variation start command is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information for designating the variation pattern) for designating the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The information for designating the variation pattern includes the variation pattern information (P1 to P24) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for designating the current gaming state, the determination of the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination. As a result, symbol information for designating the hit type is included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the first special symbol and a variation corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variation pattern designation command, the effect symbol game effect to be started this time It is possible to determine whether the (variation display of the effect symbol) relates to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. Note that the variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

  Further, when the above-described “state change command” is included in the received change start command, information indicating that the gaming state has changed (gaming state change information) is included. Here, as described above, the state change command is a command indicating that the gaming state shifts (changes) from the high probability state to the low probability state, or shifts (changes) from the high base state to the low base state. For example, it is transmitted from the main control unit 80 at the timing when the next variation display following the variation display of the special symbol (for example, the 100th variation display in the short-time gaming state) that triggers the end of the high base state is started. It is what is done. Therefore, as a result of the analysis of the change start command by S4502, the special symbol change display that is started this time (the change display of the effect symbol) is in the high base state depending on whether or not the game state change information is included in the change start command. It becomes possible to determine whether or not it corresponds to the first fluctuation display after shifting to the low base state. As a result, if it corresponds to the first variation display after shifting to the low base state, a command for specifying the display of the left-handed instruction image (left-handed instruction image display command) is used as a variation effect start command in S4507 described later. In order to set them in the sub output buffer, a left-handed instruction flag (not shown) is turned ON.

  Next, in S4503, the production control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining an effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from “1” to “5”, and each value is assigned to the production modes A to E. Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect in the image display device 7. When the effect mode is different, some or all of the effect aspects of the game effect such as the notice effect and the reach effect are different. Specifically, images displayed on the image display device 7 are different, such as characters, items, and background images that appear, and the effect symbol game effect can be executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode. Further, when providing a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.), different game effects may be executable depending on the effect mode.

  Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect in the image display device 7. If the effect mode is different, some or all of the effect aspects of the game effect such as the notice effect and the reach effect are different. Specifically, the effect image displayed on the image display device 7 is effected such that the display mode (for example, symbol design, number design, etc.) of the effect symbol 8 is different, or the characters, items, and background images that appear are different. It depends on the mode. In addition, the effect design game effect and the jackpot game effect can be executed in a manner corresponding to the effect mode, and when providing a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, round effect, etc.), the effect mode Different game effects can be executed depending on the situation.

  In the present embodiment, the production mode A (mode status 1) is executed when being controlled to the low probability low base state, and the production mode B (mode status 2) is controlled to the low probability high base state. The effect mode C (mode status 3) is executed when the high-accuracy base state is controlled. Therefore, the player can grasp the current gaming state by confirming which of the effect modes is A to C. The effect mode D (mode status 4) and the effect mode E (mode status 5) are executed when the high-accuracy low base state or the low-accuracy low base state is controlled. Therefore, when the production mode is D or E, even if the player confirms the production mode, the player grasps whether the probability state of the special symbol success / failure determination is a high probability state or a low probability state (normal state). It is difficult to do. In this sense, the production modes D and E can be said to be “probability non-informing modes”.

  In this embodiment, after the end of the big hit game related to 15R first big hit and 15R fifth big hit, it becomes the production mode C, and after the big hit game related to 15R second big hit and 15R sixth big hit, the production mode B is set. After the big hit game related to 15R third big hit, the production mode is A. After the big hit game related to 2R fourth big hit, and after the end of the small hit game related to the first small hit and second small hit Mode D or E is set.

  Next, in S4504, a variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern) to be performed using the image display device 7, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like is set (S4504). Specifically, the variation effect pattern determination table to be used is set based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80. For example, when the variation pattern information designated by the received variation pattern designation command is “P1 (variation pattern P1)” (see FIG. 9), the variation effect pattern determination table is used as a hit corresponding to the current effect mode. A variation production pattern determination table is set. In this embodiment, since a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status) are stored in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, in S4504, from among these variable effect pattern determination tables, A table corresponding to the mode status (current presentation mode) referenced in S4503 is selected and set. The variation effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (the variation pattern of the effect symbol, etc.), and a plurality of variation effect pattern determination tables are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. Has been. In S4504, any one of the plurality of variation effect pattern determination tables is set.

  Next, in S4505, based on the random effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the variable effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variable effect pattern suitable for the specified variation pattern is selected and set (S4505). . As the variation effect pattern, the variation mode of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) is set. Thus, in the effect symbol game effect (variation effect), when the reach effect is executed (reach with effect symbol game effect), or when the character effect performed using a specific character (character effect symbol game effect), A case where the reach effect or the character effect is not executed (reach no effect symbol game effect) or the like is determined.

  In S4505, based on the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and a stop symbol determination table (not shown), an effect symbol to be stopped (also referred to as “stop effect symbol”) is determined and set. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the effect symbol game effect is an odd symbol such as “777” when the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is 15R first and fifth big hits (that is, V passing expected big hit). In the case of 15R 2nd, 3rd, 6th big hit (that is, V non-passing planned big hit), it is set to the even-numbered design such as “666”. In addition, when there is a reach, 3 effects such as “787”, etc., when one of the 3 effects such as “787” is different from the other effects, and when there is no reach, “635”, etc. At least one effect symbol is different from the other effect symbols among the symbols. Further, in the case of 2R fourth big hit or small hit, a predetermined chance such as “135” or a dedicated symbol such as “3 * 3” may be stopped and displayed. That is, the same effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the case of 2R fourth big hit and small hit. For this reason, the player cannot determine whether the 2R fourth big hit or the small hit is made only by confirming the effect symbols displayed in a stopped state. The stop display mode (display result of variation display) of the above-described effect symbol 8 is an example, and what can be stopped and displayed as a stop effect symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol success / failure determination can be appropriately changed.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the reach A, reach B, reach C, super reach (also referred to as “SP reach”) A, super reach B, super Reach C, character effects, and the like are set, and in S4505, based on the variable effect pattern determination table, any of these effects is performed or these effects are not performed (this is also referred to as “normal variation”). ) Is determined. Then, when the reachable effect game effect is executed, any reach effect is set based on the change pattern designation command and the change effect pattern determination table. Here, when the super reach effect is executed as the effect symbol game effect, it is set to be more likely to be a big hit than when the normal reach effect is executed. That is, it can be said that the super reach production is a game production with a high hit reliability (possibility of being a big hit) compared to the reach (normal reach) production.

  In this embodiment, when a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (see FIG. 9) having a variation time of 30000 ms or more is received, a variation effect pattern including a reach effect is set (executed). Among them, when a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern having a variation time of 450,000 ms or more is received, a variation effect pattern (SP reach effect pattern) including SP reach is set (executed). That is, the presence / absence of the reach effect is determined by the selection of the special symbol variation pattern by the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81). Reach variable pattern "exists. In this embodiment, the reach non-variation pattern (variation pattern with a variation time of less than 30000 ms) has only “out-of-range variation pattern”. There is a “variation pattern”.

  Next, in S4506, a notice effect setting process related to the setting of the notice effect is performed (S4506). This notice effect setting process (S4506) is another notice effect excluding the hold notice effect (hold change notice) that is the object of the previous hold notice setting process (S4400), that is, the first effect on hold based on the result of prior determination. This is a process for a notice effect other than the notice effect by 9a or the second effect hold 9b. Hereinafter, the notice effect that is the target of the notice effect setting process (S4506) is also referred to as “variable notice effect” in order to distinguish it from the reserved notice effect. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a notice effect (preliminary notice of reservation) based on a prior determination result or a notice effect (current notice of change) related to the current special-figure change display (variable effect) as the variable notice effect. It has become. As the change notice effect, for example, a pseudo-continuous notice that makes it appear that the change display of the effect symbol is continuously performed a plurality of times, a step-up notice that displays a predetermined notice image step by step, and a background that changes the background image There are a change notice, an item notice for displaying a predetermined item image, a character notice for displaying a predetermined character image, a button notice based on the operation of the effect button 63, and the like. In addition, when the above-described hold notice effect (hold change notice) is not executed in the effect hold display area, the effect hold remains from the effect hold display area 9c (9d) in the normal display mode (circular white, triangular white). When the display is moved to the variable hold display area 9e and the display mode of the production hold changes to the predetermined notice display form for the first time on the variable hold display area 9e, the hold change can be regarded as a kind of “the change notice”. Because it can, it is included in the change notice effect.

  In S4506, the execution pattern (variation notice effect pattern) of the notice effect including whether or not to execute such various change notice effects (execution presence / absence) is set. More specifically, based on the random number for determining the notice effect acquired in S4501, the notice determination table stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, the storage contents (effect hold information) in the effect hold information storage area, etc. A pattern is determined including whether or not a change notice effect is to be executed, and a pattern for execution is set.

  In addition, the storage contents of the production hold information stored in S4395 (the storage contents of the production hold information storage area) and the result of the special symbol success / failure determination specified by the analysis result of the change start command in S4502 (this special figure change) The result of the determination of whether or not it relates to the display), and the notice effect pattern set in S4506 based on the variation pattern information of the special symbol specified by the analysis result of the variation start command (the variation pattern and the stop symbol related to the current special diagram variation display) In other words, the type of change notice effect (notice type) and mode to be executed, the presence / absence of the change notice effect, and the like are different. In addition, when executing a variable notice effect, one of the plural notice effects may be performed (one kind of notice effect), or two or more notice effects (multiple kinds of notice effects) may be combined. In other words, a plurality of types of notice effects may be performed at each execution timing during one variation display (during variation effects).

  Next, in S4507, based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 and the notice effect pattern (variation notice effect pattern) set in S4506, the effect symbol game effect (the effect symbol 8 variable display, reach effect, notice effect, etc.) A variation production start command for starting is set in the sub output buffer (S4507), and the variation production start processing is ended. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 determines the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. The predetermined variation effect image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in step S1 and the notification effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, the predetermined notification effect image corresponding to the notification effect pattern set in S4506 Data is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and a change effect display, a notice effect, etc. based on the read image data are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Moreover, the fluctuation display (flashing display) by two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

  In step S4507, it is determined whether the left-handed instruction flag is ON. If the left-handed instruction flag is ON, the left-handed instruction image display command is included in the variable effect start command and set in the sub output buffer. Here, the left-handed instruction flag indicates that the game state change information is included in the change start command as a result of analyzing the change start command in S4502 described above, that is, the game state is in the high base state (right-handed game This flag is turned ON when the state is shifted (changed) from the low base state (left-handed gaming state). When the left-handed instruction image display command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006) together with the variation effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 converts the image data for variation effect and the image data for notice effect. In addition, the image data for left-handed instruction notification is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect, the notice effect, the left-handed instruction notification, etc. are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 by the read image data. To do. Further, along with the execution (start) of the left-handed instruction notification, the right-handed instruction image 71 (see FIG. 52B) that has been displayed in the high base state is erased from the display screen 7a.

  Note that the left-handed instruction flag turned ON based on the analysis result of the change start command in S4502 described above sets the left-handed instruction image display command (variation start command) in the sub output buffer, or the left-handed instruction image Based on the transmission of the display command (variation start command) to the image control board 100, it is turned OFF. Accordingly, the effect control microcomputer 91 turns off a right-handed display flag, which will be described later.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), the left-handed instruction notification performed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) of the present embodiment is displayed on the left-handed display area 70c provided on the display screen 7a. This is done by displaying a left-handed instruction image 70 instructing to fire a game ball toward the area 3A. The left-handed instruction image 70 includes a left-handed character image 70a representing the characters “please return to left-handed” and three left arrow images 70b positioned above the left-handed character image 70a. In the present embodiment, the left-handed instruction image 70 is displayed in the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a (left-handed display area) as the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state and the first effect symbol 8 starts to change. 70c). As a result, players who have been making a right turn in the high base state and proceeding with the game (symbol fluctuation game) until now are left-handed (returned to the left-hand side) as the game moves to the low-base state. It has been actively promoted. The left-handed instruction image 70 is displayed on the display screen 7a (left-handed display area 70c) and then deleted when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses (the left-handed instruction notification ends).

[Right-handed instruction image display processing]
Next, the right-handed instruction image display process (S4600) executed as a subroutine of the jackpot game-related effect process (S4409) in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the right-handed instruction image display process (S4600), it is first determined whether or not the right-handed display flag is OFF (S4601). Here, the right-handed display flag is a flag for indicating (determining) whether or not the right-handed instruction image 71 is being displayed on the display screen 7a (right-handed display area 71c) of the image display device 7. When it is OFF, it indicates that it is not displayed. When it is ON, it indicates that it is being displayed. If it is determined in S4601 that the right-handed display flag is not OFF (NO in S4601), that is, if the right-handed display flag is ON, the right-handed instruction image 71 is being displayed. This processing is finished without performing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S4601 that the right-handed display flag is OFF (YES in S4601), it is determined whether or not the big hit game related command received in S4405 is a 1R start command (S4602). The jackpot game-related effect processing (S4409) is executed when the jackpot game-related command is received (YES in S4408) as described above. Is a 1R start command. As a result, if the command is not a 1R start command (NO in S4602), the process ends without performing the processes after S4603.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S4602 that it is a 1R start command (YES in S4602), a right-handed instruction image display start command is set in the sub output buffer (S4603), a right-handed display flag is turned ON (S4604), This process is finished. The right-handed instruction image display start command set in S4603 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006) together with the 1R start effect command set in the sub output buffer in the process of S4409 based on the reception of the 1R start command. Is done. Thereby, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the round effect display is performed on almost the entire screen, and the current round number is displayed in the round number display area 72a provided at the upper left of the screen. Is displayed, and a right-handed instruction image 71 is displayed in a right-handed display area 71c provided at the upper right of the screen. Here, as shown in FIGS. 52A and 52B, the right-handed instruction image 71 of the present embodiment includes a right-handed character image 71a representing a “right-handed” character and a right-handed character image 71a. And one right arrow image 71b located in the position. The right-handed instruction image 71 has a smaller display size than the moving image display of the first hitting right-handed instruction notification and the left-handed instruction image 70 described above.

  In addition, the right-handed instruction image 71 of the present embodiment is displayed on the right after the start of the first round of the big hit game by the processing of S4602 and S4603 described above, and then turned right by the processing of S4604. The display is continued until the display flag is turned off. As described above, the right-handed display flag indicates the number of times that the high base state is terminated while the special symbol is displayed in the high base state. 100 times of change display) is performed, and the game state is turned OFF at the timing when the low special state (low probability low base state) is entered and the first special symbol change display is started. Therefore, the display of the right-handed instruction image 71 (right-handed instruction notification by the image display device 7) in this embodiment is a special number of times when the high base state is a predetermined number of times after the start of the first round of the big hit game related to the first hit. The process is performed in the right-handed display area 71c on the display screen 7a until the display is completed based on the execution of the symbol variation display. In this embodiment, the game state after the big hit game is a probabilistic gaming state if the big hit is a probable big hit, and a short-time gaming state if the big hit is a non-probable big hit (normal big hit). Will always be in a high base state. Therefore, after the first hit, until the high base state ends without generating a big hit in the high base state, the display of the right-handed instruction image 71 (right-handed instruction notification by the image display device 7) is the right-handed display area 71c. Continuously.

  Specifically, when display of the right-handed instruction image 71 is started in the right-handed display area 71c with the start of the first round of the big hit game related to the first hit (see FIG. 52 (a)), The display of the right-handed instruction image 71 is continued even in the high base state (high-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state) after the big hit game (see FIG. 52B). Thereafter, for example, when a big hit is made in a high base state (that is, “Ran Chang”), the display of the right-handed instruction image 71 continued from the first round relating to the first hit is a fanfare effect of the big hit game relating to the consecutive hit. The round effect and the ending effect are continued while being executed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and are also continued in the subsequent high base state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state). Also, when the end condition for the high base state is satisfied without generating a big hit in the high base state, for example, when the special symbol variation display is performed 100 times in the high base state, the next variation display starts. Accordingly, the display of the right-handed instruction image 71 ends (the right-handed instruction image 71 is deleted) and the left-handed instruction image 70 is displayed in the left-handed display area 70c (left-handed instruction notification by the image display device 7). Is performed (see FIG. 52C).

[Effects of Example 1]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the gaming state is controlled to the low base state (low probability low base state or high probability low base state) and the gaming state is high base state (low probability). The mode of the on-hold announcement effect that can be executed differs depending on whether it is controlled to the high base state or the highly accurate high base state). That is, in the special figure 1 hold notice effect that can be executed in the low base state (first game state), the first effect hold 9a is displayed in a mode in which the display color is different from the normal display mode. (See FIG. 50). On the other hand, in the special figure 2 hold advance notice effect that can be executed in the high base state (second game state), the display color of the second effect hold 9b displayed in the effect hold display area is different from the normal display mode. It is displayed in a form including a predetermined image (in this example, the smoke image S) (see FIGS. 51A to 51D), and in the special base 1 hold notice effect in the low base state. Includes a display mode change (second notice effect) of effect suspension in the non-existent variable hold display area 9e (see FIG. 51 (e)). This makes it possible to differentiate the hold notice effect between the low base state and the high base state, and to attract the player's interest in the hold notice effect in each gaming state.

  In particular, in this embodiment, the special figure 1 hold notice effect in the low base state mainly changes the display mode (color change) of the first effect hold 9a, and the variable hold display from the first effect display area 9c. While the display mode change (second notice effect) of the first effect hold 9a moved to the area 9e is not executed (first form), the special figure 2 hold notice effect in the high base state is The display mode change (color change in this example) of the second effect hold 9b including the predetermined image (smoke image S in this example) is mainly performed, and in addition to this, the second effect display area 9d to the variable hold display area 9e. It is an aspect (second aspect) in which the display aspect change (second notice effect) of the second effect suspension 9b that has moved to is executed. For this reason, in the hold notice effect in the low base state (Special Figure 1 hold notice effect) and the hold notice effect in the high base state (Special Figure 2 hold notice effect), the latter has an impact on the player compared to the former. It becomes easy to give, and it will be possible to differentiate the hold notice effect firmly in the low base state and the high base state. As a result, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the hold notice effect in each gaming state, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the display of the effect hold (second effect hold 9b) in the case of performing the hold notice effect in the high base state where the digestion pace of the special figure hold becomes faster than in the low base state. The mode is a more conspicuous mode (highlighted display mode) than the display mode of the production hold (first production hold 9a) in the hold notice effect in the low base state, and the hold notice in the low base state In the production, a display mode change (second notice production) of the production hold in the variable hold display area 9e that is not executed can be executed. For this reason, in the high base state, it becomes easier to attract the player's interest to the hold notice effect, and it is possible to realize a game that is less likely to get bored. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in a high base state in which the game tends to be monotonous by repeating the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) with the shortened variation.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the positions of the first effect hold display area 9c and the second effect hold display area 9d change according to the game state (in this example, they are switched up and down). Specifically, when the gaming state is in the low base state, the first effect hold display area 9c is located above the second effect hold display area 9d, and when the game state is in the high base state described later, The second effect hold display area 9d is located above the first effect hold display area 9c. In other words, the main production suspension (first production) in the low base state where the increase / decrease (digestion) of special figure 1 is the main and the high base state where the increase / decrease (digestion) of special figure 2 is the main. The display area of the effect hold corresponding to the hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b) is always at the same position (in this example, the upper area of the effect hold display areas provided above and below). In this way, regardless of the game state, the display area of the main production hold is fixed, so that changes in the display mode of the production hold (increase / decrease in display number, change in display color, change in shape, etc.) Can be communicated more easily to the person. This makes it easier to attract the player's interest in the hold notice effect in each gaming state.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the notice target hold is removed and the change corresponds to the super reach change, the predetermined period after the release super reach change is set as the hold notice prohibition period, and during that period, the hold notice is given. The production is not executed (started). For this reason, for example, even if a high-reliability super-reach effect is performed with a hold notice effect, and the player is greatly discouraged due to the disengagement, the hold notice effect is not executed for a while after that. By doing so, it becomes possible to prevent the player's reliability and expectation with respect to the hold notice effect from being significantly impaired. Thereby, it can suppress that the production | presentation effect of a reservation notice effect falls, and it becomes possible to maintain the interest with respect to a reservation notice effect.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a right-handed gaming state (predetermined gaming state) in which a game ball is launched (right-handed) toward the right gaming region 3B (predetermined region) of the gaming region 3 to play a game. ) At least a special gaming state (first predetermined gaming state) and a high base state (second predetermined gaming state). Further, a right-handed instruction notification (predetermined instruction notification) for instructing to fire a game ball toward the right game area 3B includes a special game state (big hit game) and a high base state (probability game state, short-time game state). Thus, it can be executed in the same manner. As a result, for the player, although the gaming state is different between the special gaming state and the high base state, the right-handed instruction notification is executed in the same manner, so in either gaming state of the special gaming state or the high base state Even if it exists, it becomes easy to recognize the right-handed instruction notification.

  In particular, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the right-handed instruction image 71 is displayed in the right-handed display area 71c of the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) with the start of the first round of the big hit game, and the right-handed The instruction notification is started (executed). The right-handed instruction notification (display of the right-handed instruction image 71 in the right-handed display area 71c) is continuously executed until the big hit game is finished (in this example, the ending effect is finished). After the game, the game state is continuously executed even after the game state shifts to a high base state (a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state). That is, the right-handed instruction notification in the form (predetermined form) in which the right-handed instruction image 71 is displayed in the right-handed display area 71c is continuously executed from the start of the big hit game (the first round) to the high base state. It has become. Thus, for the player, even if the gaming state shifts from the special gaming state to the high base state, the right-handed instruction notification is executed in the same manner before and after the transition. It becomes easy to recognize. In particular, since the same right-handed instruction image 71 is displayed at the same display position (right-handed display area 71c) in the special game state and the high base state, the ease of recognizing the right-handed instruction notification is more remarkable. It will be a thing.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a big hit (continuous change) is made in the high base state, and the right-handed instruction notification that has been made during the high base state when the big hit game related to the big hit (continuous change) is executed. (Display of the right-handed instruction image 71 in the right-handed display area 71c) is continuously executed even in the big hit game related to the continuous game. That is, the right-handed instruction notification in a form (predetermined form) in which the right-handed instruction image 71 is displayed in the right-handed display area 71c is continuously executed from the high base state to the big hit game. Thus, for the player, even if the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the special gaming state, the right-handed instruction notification is executed in the same manner before and after the transition. It becomes easy to recognize. In particular, since the same right-handed instruction image 71 is displayed at the same display position (right-handed display area 71c) in the high base state and the special game state, the ease of recognizing the right-handed instruction notification is more remarkable. It will be a thing.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the opening effect in the case of a big hit (first hit) in the low probability low base state, the first hit opening effect including the right hitting instruction notification for the first hit is performed. It has become. The right hitting instruction notification for the first hit is to display a moving image depicting a game ball entering the big winning opening 30 located at the lower part of the right game area 3B at the approximate center of the display screen 7a. This is a more conspicuous aspect than the right-handed instruction notification in which the right-handed instruction image 71 is displayed in the right-handed display area 71c. For this reason, it is possible to actively encourage a player who has made a left turn in a low base state to advance a right turn at the start of the big hit game.

  On the other hand, in the opening effect (continuous channel opening effect) in the case of a big hit in the high base state (continuous channel opening effect), the right hit instruction notification for the first hit like the initial hit opening effect (right hitting at the center of the screen) The right-handed instruction notification (display of the right-handed instruction image 71 in the right-handed display area 71c) that has been performed during the high base state is performed without performing the prompting moving image display). Thereby, it is possible to avoid the player from feeling annoyed by avoiding the repeated right-handed instruction notification being repeated many times by repeating the chain. In particular, the right-handed instruction notification during the high base state is continuously executed in the same mode (the same image and the same display position) from the special game state (at the time of the big hit game) before shifting to the high base state. So, for the player, it can be said that the player is fully aware that he will make a right turn at the time when the chain is generated. For this reason, it is effective in consideration of the player's psychology to perform the right-handed instruction notification in the high base state as it is without performing the right-handed instruction notification similar to the first hit opening effect in the continuous opening effect. It can be said that this is a simple instruction notification.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, with the start of the big hit game related to the first hit, from the start of the first round, the subsequent high base state is based on the execution of the variable symbol display of a predetermined number of times. The right-handed instruction image 71 is continuously displayed in the right-handed display area 71c until the end. In other words, consistently from the start of the first round of the big hit game related to the first hit to the end of the consecutive period, the right-handed instruction image is compared with the screen size toward the corner of the display screen 7a (upper right in this example). It is displayed in a small size, and right-handed instruction notification is performed in a mode that does not stand out too much. This is a gaming state in which the player is right-handed while avoiding hindrance to the jackpot gaming effect executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the effect symbol game effect during the high base state. It is possible to fully recognize (impress).

  In the first embodiment described above, the hold notice effect (hold change notice) based on the special figure hold prior determination result is mainly used for the difference in display color of the effect hold (in this example, white, blue, green, red, gold) ) Suggests the jackpot reliability, but the mode of suggesting the jackpot reliability in the hold notice effect (that is, the mode of the hold notice effect) is not limited to this. For example, a character suggesting a big hit reliability such as “chance” or “extreme heat” may be displayed in the production hold, or a symbol or a figure suggesting other big hit reliability may be displayed. In this case, for example, in the low base state where the suspended digestion pace is relatively slow, the jackpot reliability is suggested by the display of characters, symbols, etc. by the performance suspension, and in the high base state where the retained digestion pace is relatively fast, As shown in the first embodiment, the big hit reliability is suggested in the display color of the on-hold display, and the big hit reliability suggestion mode (the execution mode of the on-hold notice effect) is changed depending on the game state. Also good. In this way, it is possible to make a hold notice effect suitable for the gaming state, and to make the hold notice effect differentiable in each game state.

  Further, in the first embodiment described above, the hold notice effect pattern (execution mode of the hold notice effect) is partially the same in the low base state and the high base state (see Fig. 1 Hold notice type A to C and special figure 2 reservation notice types A to C) and tables for selecting (determining) a reservation notice effect pattern (special figure 1 reservation notice tables A to C and special figure 2 reservation notice tables A to C) Also, except for the presence or absence of 2R big hit, it was basically the same data structure (type, number, selection rate, etc. of hold notice effect patterns that can be selected). In contrast, the data structure of the hold notice table used for setting the hold notice effect pattern (S4456) is different between the low base state and the high base state, and the types of selectable (executable) hold notice effect patterns are different. It may be different, the number of selectable (executable) hold notice effect patterns may be different, or the selection rate of the hold notice effect patterns may be different. In this case, for example, in the low base state where the suspended digestion pace is relatively slow, the type (number) of the pending notice effect patterns that can be selected (executable) as compared with the high base state where the retained digestion pace is relatively fast are set. It is possible to increase the number, or to increase the selection rate of the holding notice effect pattern having a high hitting reliability. Or, on the contrary, in the high base state, the types (number) of hold notice effect patterns that can be selected (executable) are higher than in the low base state, or the hitting reliability is relatively high. It is also possible to increase the selection rate of the hold notice effect pattern.

  In the first embodiment, the present invention is applied to the hold notice effect (hold change notice) based on the prior determination result. However, the present invention is also applicable to a notice effect other than the hold notice effect. . For example, instead of or in addition to the hold notice effect according to the first embodiment, as a notice effect (hold prefetch notice) based on the prior determination result, on the display screen 7a (for example, the background display region 7c) of the image display device 7. A predetermined notice effect image indicating an item, a character, or the like may be displayed, and the jackpot reliability may be suggested depending on the type of the item, the character, or the like indicated by the notice effect image.

  Specifically, for example, the notice effect images A to D corresponding to each of the four types “Character A to Character D” are provided as the notice effect images, and the effect hold in the hold notice effect according to the first embodiment described above is provided. Of the display colors, the character positioned corresponding to “blue” is “Character A” (notice effect image A), the character positioned corresponding to “green” is “character B” (notice effect image B), and “red” "Character C" (notice effect image C), and a character positioned corresponding to "golden" as "Character D" (notice effect image D). Then, one of the notice effect images A to D is displayed in response to the occurrence of the notice subject hold, and the display is continued until the notice subject hold is completed, or the notice effect image is displayed from the display until the notice subject hold is consumed. In the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, various display patterns (notice effect patterns) of the notice effect image are provided, such as changing to a value that has a higher hit reliability than the beginning (so-called step-up). Even in this way, by changing the display pattern of the notice effect image in the low base state and the high base state, the type and number of the notice effect images that can be displayed when executing the notice effect are different depending on the gaming state, or the notice effect. It is possible to change the mode of change when the notice effect image changes step by step until the notice target suspension is completed. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the notice effect in each gaming state, and further, it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

  Alternatively, one notice effect image is displayed when the notice target hold is generated, and then the number of the notice effect images displayed is changed (for example, increased) or displayed before the notice target hold is consumed. By changing (for example, enlarging) the display size of the effect image, the big hit reliability is suggested, and the notice effect pattern in which the change mode and the type of image to be displayed are different is the same as in the first embodiment. It is good also as providing. This also makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the notice effect in each gaming state, and in turn, it is possible to improve the gaming interest. Further, the present invention can be applied to background change notice. That is, it is also possible to use a plurality of the aforementioned notice effect images (for example, the notice effect images A to D) as background images. This also makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the notice effect in each game state by making the background change notice mode different between the low base state and the high base state.

  Further, in the first embodiment described above, regarding the display mode change (second notice effect) of the effect hold in the variable hold display area 9e, in the special figure 1 hold notice effect when the gaming state is controlled to the low base state, The display state change of the first effect hold 9a moved from the first effect hold display area 9c to the variable hold display area 9e is not executed in the change hold display area 9e, and the gaming state is controlled to the high base state. In the special figure 2 hold notice effect at the time when the display is being performed, the change display mode of the second effect hold 9b moved from the second effect hold display area 9d to the change hold display area 9e can be executed in the change hold display area 9e. ing. That is, the special figure 1 hold notice effect in the low base state is a form (first form) in which the change in display mode of the effect hold (second notice effect) in the variable hold display area 9e is not executed. The special figure 2 hold notice effect in the state is an aspect (second form) in which the change of display state of the effect hold (second notice effect) in the variable hold display area 9e can be executed.

  On the other hand, the special figure 1 hold notice effect in the low base state is set as a form (second form) in which the change in display form (second notice effect) of the effect hold in the variable hold display area 9e can be executed. The special figure 2 hold notice effect in the base state can be changed to a form (first form) in which the change of display state of the effect hold (second notice effect) in the variable hold display area 9e is not executed. In this way, the special drawing hold speed is slow compared to the high base state, and as a result, the effect in the variable hold display area 9e in the low base state in which the display period (display time) of the effect hold is relatively long. It becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the change in the display mode of the hold (second notice effect).

  Alternatively, for both the special figure 1 hold notice effect in the low base state and the special figure 2 hold notice effect in the high base state, the change in display mode of the effect hold in the variable hold display area 9e (second notice effect) It is also possible to adopt a mode (second mode) in which can be executed. In this case, the low-base state and the high-base state are configured such that the display mode change mode (also referred to as “variable hold change mode”) of the effect hold in the variable hold display area 9e is different. Examples of the variation hold change mode include “change in display color of effect hold”, “change in shape of effect hold”, “change in size of effect hold”, etc. In the low base state, “change in display color of effect hold” In the high base state, it is possible to change the variation hold change mode depending on the game state, such as “change in shape of effect hold”. In addition, it is possible to vary the variation hold change mode depending on the presence or absence of effects related to the hold change such as the display of the lightning image G shown in FIG. In this way, it is possible to differentiate the hold notice effect (hold change) in the variable hold display area 9e between the low base state and the high base state, and attract the player's interest in the hold notice effect. It becomes possible.

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. The present embodiment (embodiment 2) mainly has an aspect of a hold notice effect that can be executed (startable) in a high base state and a point that the hold notice effect can be executed (can be started) even during a big hit game. This is different from the first embodiment. In the following, differences (configuration, operational effects, etc.) from the first embodiment will be mainly described, and descriptions of points (configurations, operational effects, etc.) common to the first embodiment will be omitted.

  In this embodiment, the hold notice effect that can be executed in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) is different from that in the first embodiment. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the special figure 2 hold notice effect that can be executed in the high base state is based on the hold notice effect patterns belonging to the special figure 2 hold notice types A to D (FIG. 49A). To (d), see FIGS. 51 (b) to (e)). On the other hand, in this embodiment, instead of the special figure 2 reservation notice types A to D, the special notice that can execute the hold notice effect by the special figure 2 reservation notice type E (patterns E1 to E4) in the high base state. 2 Hold notice effect (see FIG. 53 (b)). The special figure 2 reservation notice effect by the special figure 2 reservation notice type E displays characters, symbols, etc. suggesting the big hit reliability in the effect reservation (here, the second effect hold 9b). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), a mode in which the symbol “?” Is attached to the second rendering suspension 9b (see FIG. 51 (a)) of triangular white color (normal display mode) (see FIG. Pattern E1), an embodiment with a symbol “!” (Pattern E2), an embodiment with a character “heat” (one Kanji character) (pattern E3), and an embodiment with a character “V” (one alphabetic character) ( The pattern E4) is the display mode (notice display mode) of the second effect hold 9b displayed when the special figure 2 hold notice effect of the special figure 2 hold notice type E is executed.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 91 executes the hold notice setting process (S4400) shown in FIG. 45, determines that the current gaming state is the high base state (YES in S4451), and receives this time. If it is determined that the starting start command is the second start entering command (YES in S4453), it is determined in S4454 whether or not the special figure 2 hold notice effect by the special figure 2 hold notice type E is executed. (S4454). In this embodiment, as a condition (execution condition) for executing the special figure 2 reservation notice effect by the special figure 2 reservation notice type E, it is determined that the execution lottery of the reservation notice effect will be won. That is, whether or not to execute the special figure 2 hold notice effect by the special figure 2 hold notice type E based on the random number for determining the hold notice effect obtained in S4454 and the lottery table (not shown) (random number) Lottery). In this embodiment, the probability of winning the execution lottery is about 30%. As a result, when the special figure 2 hold notice effect by the special figure 2 hold notice type E is to be executed (YES in S4455), that is, when the execution lottery is won, the special figure 2 shown in FIG. 53 (b). A special notice 2 hold notice effect pattern (any one of patterns E1 to E4) is set based on the set notice table E and a random number value for determining the notice notice on hold acquired in S4456. Is determined (selected) and set (S4456).

  As shown in FIG. 53 (b), the special figure 2 reservation notice table E of the present embodiment includes the second start reservation command received in S4390 described above and the second effect reservation information stored in S4395 described above (that is, "Results of 2nd special symbol success / failure determination" (outgoing, small hit, big hit), "reach presence / absence in case of outage" (variation time) and "big hit in case of big win" A data structure in which a random number (0 to 99) for determining a holding notice effect is assigned to any of a plurality of selectable holding notice effects patterns for each of the “big hit type” (15R fifth big hit, 15R sixth big hit) It has become.

  Special figure 2 The hold notice effect patterns that can be selected based on the hold notice table E are the aforementioned "patterns E1 to E4" (see FIG. 53 (b)). Among them, the pattern E4 displaying the second effect hold 9b (hereinafter also referred to as “V hold”) with “V” indicates that the special figure 2 prior determination result related to the notice target hold is 15R fifth big hit (V passing expected big hit) ) Is a V passing planned jackpot fixed pattern that can be selected only in the case of. That is, it is a probability variation big hit definite pattern. Also, among the patterns E1 to E3 other than the pattern E4, the pattern E3 displaying the second effect hold 9b (hereinafter also referred to as “heat hold”) with “heat” is a special figure 2 prior determination related to the notice target hold. The result can be selected when the result is either a hit with a reach, a small hit or a big hit (a case other than a hit with no reach), and the second effect hold 9b (hereinafter referred to as “! Hold”) with “!”. The pattern E2 that displays “)” and the pattern E1 that displays the second effect hold 9b (hereinafter also referred to as “? Hold”) with “?” Are not shown in FIG. It can be selected in any case of (no reach, with reach), small hit and big hit (V passing plan, V non-passing plan).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), when the special figure 2 preliminary determination result relating to the notice target hold is a big hit, the pattern E3 (thermal hold) can be selected (selected) among the patterns E1 to E3. Rate) is the highest, and the possibility of selection in the order of pattern E2 (! Hold) and pattern E1 (? Hold) is reduced. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 preliminary determination result relating to the notice target hold is a small hit or miss, the pattern E1 (? Hold) is most likely to be selected (selection rate) among the patterns E1 to E3. Therefore, the possibility of selection in the order of the pattern E2 (! Hold) and the pattern E3 (heat hold) is reduced. For this reason, in the special figure 2 hold notice effect in the high base state of this embodiment, “V hold” has the big hit reliability “100%”, and the big hit reliability other than “V hold” has the highest “heat hold”. Hereinafter, the jackpot reliability is set to decrease in the order of “! Hold” and “? Hold”.

  In S4456, based on such a special figure 2 reservation notice table E, any one of the special figure 2 reservation notice effect patterns E1 to E4 is selected and set. Also, in this embodiment, when the special figure 2 hold notice effect pattern set in S4456 is the pattern E1 (? Hold) or the pattern E2 (! Hold), the effect control microcomputer 91 is set in accordance with the setting. A holding notice flag (not shown) is turned ON. When the special-purpose figure 2 hold notice flag is turned ON, the effect control microcomputer 91 then digests the notice target hold that triggered the setting of the pattern E1 or pattern E2, or will be described later before the notice target hold is consumed. It is turned off by executing the hold notice effect when passing V. Therefore, it can be said that the special figure 2 reserved notice flag is a flag indicating that the pattern E1 or the pattern E2 is set as the special figure 2 reserved notice effect pattern, and the special figure 2 reserved notice effect based on the pattern E1 or the pattern E2. Can be said to be a flag indicating that “?? hold” or “! Hold” is being displayed.

  A hold notice effect command for instructing execution of the special figure 2 hold notice effect pattern set in S4456 is set in the sub output buffer (S4457), and when the set command is transmitted to the image control board 100, the image control microcomputer 101 designates image data (pending hold image data, etc.) for hold notice effect corresponding to the special figure 2 hold notice effect pattern of the special figure 2 hold notice type E specified based on the received hold notice effect command. A special figure 2 reservation notice effect (here, special figure 2 reservation notice type E) based on the read image data is read from the ROM of the substrate 100 and executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  In the special figure 2 hold notice effect by the special figure 2 hold notice type E (patterns E1 to E4), the special figure at that time is based on the storage (occurrence) of the notice target hold that becomes the trigger of the special figure 2 hold notice effect. 2nd effect hold 9b is “V hold”, “heat hold”, “! Hold” and “? Hold” at a predetermined position in the second effect hold display area 9d (display screen 7a) corresponding to the number of 2 hold balls. It is displayed in any mode (notice display mode). For example, when the special figure 2 holding ball number becomes “2” due to the storage of the notice target hold, the second effect hold 9b is added in the notice display mode at the second position from the left of the second effect hold display area 9d. Is displayed. The second effect hold 9b in the additionally displayed notice display mode is displayed in a shifted manner in the second effect hold display area 9d until the notice target hold is digested in the display mode. Even after moving and displaying from the second effect hold display area 9d to the change hold display area 9e, it is displayed in the change hold display area 9e as it is until the predetermined erasure time comes.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the high base state, the special content corresponding to the special figure 1 hold that is not preferentially digested among the storage contents (holding prefetch information) of the production hold information storage area of the sub-control board 90. It is assumed that the special figure 2 production hold information corresponding to the special figure 2 hold that is preferentially digested is not initialized by initializing the production hold information shown in FIG. For this reason, for example, during the big hit game, the special figure 2 production hold information is referred to, and the production based on the special figure 2 production hold information is performed. In such a case, it is possible to maintain the execution state even during the big hit game. By utilizing this fact, in this embodiment, when a big hit is made during the high base state, it is possible to generate a holding notice effect during the big hit game.

  Specifically, in the high base state, when the special figure 2 hold notice effect is being executed, that is, when a big hit occurs during the display of the second effect hold 9b based on the notice display mode, the second effect hold based on the notice display mode is displayed. The display of 9b is continued even during the big hit game, and when V round (game ball detection by the specific area sensor 39a) occurs in the V round (in this example, 1R and 2R) in the big hit game related to the big hit Depending on the display mode (preliminary display mode) of the second presentation hold 9b displayed as described above, it is possible to execute the V-pass hold preliminary announcement stage that can change the display mode. Hereinafter, the V-pass hold notice processing (S5000) related to the execution of the V-pass hold notice effect will be described.

[Pending notice when passing V]
54. When the V passing reservation notice process (S5000) shown in FIG. 54 determines that the first V passing command has been received in S4412 (see FIG. 44) of the received command analysis process (S4302) (YES in S4412). ), Processing after S4413 and before S4414. In the hold notice process at the time of passing V (S5000), it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold notice flag is ON (S5001). As described above, the special figure 2 hold notice flag indicates that the pattern E1 or the pattern E2 is set as the special figure 2 hold notice effect pattern and the special figure 2 hold notice effect based on the pattern E1 or the pattern E2 is being executed. It is a flag to show. Therefore, when the special figure 2 hold notice flag is ON (YES in S5001), “? Hold” is displayed on the display screen 7a (second effect display area 9d) when the first V passing command during the big hit game is received. Or “! Hold” is being displayed.

  When it is determined in S5001 that the special figure 2 hold notice flag is not ON (OFF) (NO in S5001), that is, when neither “? Hold” nor “! Hold” is displayed, S5002 This process is finished without performing the subsequent processes. On the other hand, when it is determined in S5001 that the special figure 2 hold notice flag is ON (NO in S5001), that is, “? Hold” or “! Hold” is displayed as the second effect hold 9b. In this case, the notice target hold that becomes the trigger of the display (execution of the special figure 2 hold notice effect based on the pattern E1 or the pattern E2) is the special figure 2 hold related to the 15R fifth big hit (V passing expected big hit). It is determined whether or not there is (S5002). This determination is performed based on a prior determination result when the notice target hold is digested in a high probability state. As described above, in the pre-determination in the starting and entering process (S205) in the main control unit 80 (game controlling microcomputer 81), the gaming state (probability state) at the starting entering and other pachinko games other than that It is possible to make a prior determination according to the gaming state (probability state) that can be controlled by the machine 1. In addition, in the received command analysis process (S4302) in the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91), the special figure 2 acquisition random number obtained by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering command from the main control unit 80 is obtained. It is possible to specify a determination result, such as whether or not a big hit is obtained, respectively, in the case of determining in a high probability state and in the case of determining in a low probability state. The process of S5002 is performed according to this.

  If it is determined in S5002 that the notice target hold is not the special figure 2 hold related to the 15R fifth big hit (scheduled V pass big hit) (NO in S5002), the special figure 2 hold notice flag is not performed without performing the processing of S5003 to S5005 Is turned off (S5006), and the process is terminated. If the notice target hold is not the special figure 2 hold related to the 15R fifth big hit (V passing planned big hit) (NO in S5002), the notice target hold is off, the small hit and the 15R sixth big hit (V non-passing expected big hit) It means special figure 2 suspension related to any of the above. In this case, the holding notice effect based on V passing during the big hit game (V round), that is, the holding notice effect during V passing is not started (generated).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S5002 that the notice target hold is the special figure 2 hold related to the 15R fifth big hit (V pass expected big hit) (YES in S5002), the currently displayed “? Hold” or “! Hold It is determined whether or not the display mode of “is changed (S5003). In this embodiment, a V passing hold notice determining random number is provided as a kind of notice effect determining random number, the random number is acquired in S5003, and the acquired random value is determined based on a lottery table (not shown). Thus, it is determined whether to change the display mode of “? Hold” or “! Hold” currently displayed. The winning probability of the execution lottery can be arbitrarily determined, and is set to about 50% in this embodiment. As a result, if it is determined that the display mode is not to be changed (NO in S5004), the special figure 2 hold notice flag is turned off without performing the process of S5005 (S5006), and the process is terminated. Also in this case, the holding notice effect at the time of passing V is not executed (started) during the big hit game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the display mode of “? Hold” or “! Hold” currently displayed is to be changed (YES in S5004), a hold display change command for instructing the change of the display mode is displayed in the sub output buffer. (S5005), the special figure 2 hold notice flag is turned OFF (S5006), and the process is terminated. The hold display change command set in S5005 is transmitted to the image control board 100 together with the V passing notification command set in S4413 (see FIG. 44) described above. When the image control board 100 receives the hold display change command, the image control microcomputer 101 displays “? Hold” or “! Hold” which is currently displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d (display screen 7a). Is changed (changed) to “V hold”. In other words, the image data for effect suspension corresponding to “V hold” is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the read image data (V hold) is currently displayed as “? Hold” or “! Hold”. And is displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d. As a result, the hold notice effect at the time of passing V is executed (start) for the special figure 2 hold (notice object hold) that has not yet been digested as a trigger for the hold notice effect that has been started (occurred) before the big hit game. Will be.

  The hold notice effect of the present embodiment realized by the above-mentioned V pass hold notice process (S5000) will be described with reference to FIG. First, as a premise, in the high base state (right-handed gaming state), the special figure 2 holding corresponding to the special figure 2 holding ball number “2” is the big hit holding related to “15R fifth big hit” (V passing expected big hit). There is a special figure 2 hold notice effect based on the pattern E2 for the big hit hold, and the special figure 2 hold stored before that is digested and the 15R fifth big hit (V passing plan) Suppose a big hit) occurs. At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), “! Hold” is placed at a position corresponding to the special figure 2 hold ball number “2” in the second effect hold display area 9d. In addition to the display, the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed (determined display) in the effect symbol display area 7b in a big hit mode (here, the “5” double-sided is exemplified).

  When the first round is started after shifting to the jackpot game (special game) from this situation, the display screen 7a displays a predetermined round effect display, etc., and the second effect hold displayed before the jackpot game is started. 9b (second effect hold display area 9d) (see FIG. 55A) is displayed at the lower right of the screen as the first round starts, as shown in FIG. 55B. Here, in the present embodiment, the first round and the second round are V rounds (privilege determination game), so the second big prize opening 35 (V attacker) is opened in the first round and the second round.

  Thereafter, a game ball enters the second grand prize opening 35 (V attacker) opened in the first round, and at least one of the game balls entered into the second big prize opening 35 (V attacker). When the individual passes through the specific area 39 (V passage), on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), based on the V passage, a V passage notification image imitating the letter “V” in the lower left of the screen. 75 is displayed, and “! Hold” (see FIG. 55 (b)) displayed before the V passage at the lower right of the screen may be changed to “V Hold” and displayed (V pass). Time hold notice effect).

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the game in the low base state in which the first special symbol is mainly displayed in the low base state, the hold notice effect patterns defined in the special figure 1 hold notice tables A to C (FIG. 48A). ~ (See (c)) is determined in the special figure 2 reservation notice table E during the game in the high base state in which the special figure 1 hold notice effect that can be executed based on the display of the second special symbol is mainly performed The special figure 2 hold notice effect that can be executed based on the hold notice effect pattern (refer to FIG. 53 (b)) is also referred to as “first hold notice effect”, and is a jackpot game related to the big hit that occurred in the high base state. The special figure 2 hold notice effect (the hold notice effect at the time of passing V) that can be executed based on the V passage in the middle (V round) is also referred to as “second hold notice effect”.

[Effects of Example 2]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment described above, the low-base is mainly used as a holding notice effect that can be executed in a situation where a special symbol (effect symbol 8) is displayed in a variable manner (during a game other than a big hit game). Special figure 1 hold notice effect (first hold notice effect) of special figure 1 hold notice type AC which can be executed in the state and special figure 2 hold notice kind E which can be executed mainly in the high base state A hold notice effect (first hold notice effect) is provided. Further, as a hold notice effect that can be executed during the big hit game, a V pass hold notice effect (second hold notice effect) triggered by V passing in the V round is provided. For this reason, the hold notice effect can be executed (started) in each of the game state in which the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 8) can be executed and the special game state in which the big hit game is performed. Thereby, it is possible to increase the execution (start) opportunity of the hold notice effect and attract the player's interest in the hold notice effect.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the notice target hold of the special figure 2 is stored in the high base state, and the special figure 2 hold notice effect based on the pattern E1 or the pattern E2 is executed (started) as a trigger, that is, In the case where “? Hold” or “! Hold” is displayed on the display screen (effect hold display area) as the second effect hold 9b, it is stored before the notice target hold is digested. When the special figure hold (in this example, the second special figure hold) is digested and a big hit is made, during the big hit game, a further hold notice effect (V It is possible to execute a hold notice effect at the time of passage. Specifically, if the undisclosed advance notice hold stored during the big hit game is a big hit hold related to the V passing expected jackpot, it means that V passed in the big hit game (V round) before the previous notice subject hold exhaustion. On the basis of this, the presentation hold already displayed as “? Hold” or “! Hold” is changed to “V hold”, and a notice effect (V pass is clearly shown) that the hold is a V hitting expected jackpot. It is possible to execute a time hold notice effect). As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest during the jackpot game, against the hold notice effect that was started before the jackpot game (in this example, the special figure 2 hold notice effect of the special figure 2 hold notice type E). Become.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the V round of the big hit game related to the big hit that occurred in the high base state is passed as a trigger, the occurrence of the planned V pass big hit after the end of the big hit game (reams) (Chan) can be definitely suggested by the on-hold notice effect when passing V. Specifically, the notice target hold of the special figure 2 is stored in the high base state, and the special figure 2 hold notice effect based on the pattern E1 or the pattern E2 (display of “? Hold” or “! Hold”) is triggered by this. If the jackpot game related to the V pass expected jackpot is executed and the V pass is made in the jackpot game before the notice target hold is exhausted, at least the notice target hold is a hold related to the “V pass scheduled jackpot”. On the condition that it is, it is possible to execute the hold notice effect at the time of passing V. For this reason, the on-hold notice effect at the time of passing through V is a “continuous channel finalizing effect at the expected pass through jackpot” for the player. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the hold notice effect even during the big hit game.

  In particular, in this embodiment, the notice target hold that triggers the execution of the special figure 2 hold notice effect (display of “? Hold” or “! Hold”) based on the pattern E1 or the pattern E2 is at least the “V passing planned jackpot”. If the hold is not related to, the V-pass hold notice effect during the big hit game for the notice object hold will not be executed. The V-passing advance notice effect is in the same manner as the special pattern 2 hold advance notice type E "pattern E4", that is, the special figure 2 notice effect hold based on the V passing planned jackpot confirmation pattern (display of "V hold"). It has been done. For this reason, in the V-pass hold notice effect, the big hit game is started while the special figure 2 hold notice effect with relatively low reliability is being executed (in this example, “? Hold” or “! Hold” is displayed). By passing V in the jackpot game (V round), the display mode ("? Hold" or "! Hold") of the second effect hold being displayed is displayed with higher reliability (this example) Then, “V hold” is ranked up. As a result, the hold notice effect at the time of passing V becomes an effect that leads to a higher rank of the hold notice effect that is more advantageous than the hold notice effect currently being executed. It becomes possible to increase compared to the hold notice effect before the start. As a result, it becomes possible to further attract the player's interest in the execution (occurrence) of the hold notice effect at the time of passing V.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, at the time of starting the big hit game, the relatively low reliability of the special figure 2 reservation notice effect (in this example, “? Hold” or “!” Based on the pattern E1 or the pattern E2). Even if the notice target hold that triggered the execution is a hold related to the “V pass expected jackpot”, the V pass based on this when the V passes during the jackpot game. There is a possibility that the time hold notice effect is not executed (see S5003 and S5004). For this reason, even if the V passing hold notice effect does not occur when passing V in the jackpot game with the relatively unreliable special figure 2 hold notice effect, the special figure 2 hold notice being executed at that time does not occur. It does not mean that the notice target hold related to the production is not “100% V scheduled passing big hit”. In other words, the fact that the V-pass hold notice effect does not occur when V passes does not immediately lead to “denial of consecutive hits for V passing planned jackpot”. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment without impairing the effect of the holding notice effect.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen 7a not only under the condition that the variable display of the special symbol (direction symbol 8) can be executed (during a game other than the big hit game) but also during the big hit game. An effect hold 9b (second effect hold display area 9d) is displayed to enable a hold notice effect when passing V (see FIGS. 55A to 55C). For this reason, it is possible for the player to enjoy the hold notice effect by the effect on hold as well as the game state in which the variable display before the big hit game is started is possible. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract a player's interest in the display mode (holding notice effect) of an effect hold.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the big hit game, the display position of the production hold (production hold display area) is set to the lower right of the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the special design (production design 8) can be executed. It is assumed that the production hold (production hold display area) is displayed at a relatively inconspicuous position as compared to the gaming state (see FIGS. 55A to 55C). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the display of the effect suspension (effect hold display area) during the big hit game (holding notice effect) from interfering with other effect displays such as the round effect display during the big hit game. In this regard, regarding the display of the effect hold (effect hold display area) during the big hit game, the display size can be reduced as compared with the game state in which the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 8) can be executed. is there. In addition, if it does not hinder the effect display during the big hit game, it is also possible to display the effect hold (effect hold display area) in the same manner as the game state in which the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 8) can be executed It is.

  In the second embodiment described above, the hold notice effect related to the special figure 2 hold that can be executed in the high base state (the special figure 2 hold notice effect) is the target of the hold notice effect at the time of passing V during the big hit game. The hold notice effect related to the special figure 1 hold that can be executed in the low base state (the special figure 1 hold notice effect) may be the target of the hold notice effect when passing V during the big hit game. In this case, as a specification of the pachinko gaming machine, for example, a specification that preferentially digests the special figure 1 reservation (change display of the first special symbol) is given priority over the special figure 2 reservation digestion (variable display of the second special symbol). Or, the specification that digests in order from the oldest stored one of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold without setting the priority order for the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold. Entering order (memory order) is preferable.

  Further, in the above-described second embodiment, the target of the V-pass hold notice effect is the undigested special figure 2 hold stored before the big hit game, and the special figure 2 hold notice effect based on the pattern E1 or the pattern E2 The notice target hold that triggered the execution of is a target for the notice of hold notice during V passing during the big hit game (V round). In other words, the second effect hold 9b displayed in the “? Hold” or “! Hold” notice display mode is the target of the notice of hold notice during V passing during the big hit game (V round). On the other hand, the undrawn special figure 2 hold stored before the big hit game, which does not correspond to the advance notice hold, that is, the second effect hold 9b displayed in the normal display mode, It may be a target of a hold notice effect at the time of passing V during a game (V round). For example, the special white-colored second effect reservation 9b corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number “1” displayed at the left end in the second effect reservation display area 9d shown in FIG. You may comprise so that the pre-announcement effect at the time of V passage based on V passage can be performed using the prior determination result of figure hold. In this way, even if the holding notice effect is not executed for the holding memory based on the starting ball before the big hit game, if the big hit game is executed before the holding of the hold, the hold is made during the big hit game. It becomes possible to attract the player's interest in (normal display mode production hold).

  In the second embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives a command (first V pass command) transmitted from the main control unit when the V pass in the V round of the jackpot game related to the V pass expected jackpot is triggered. Based on the above, it is possible to execute the hold notice effect at the time of passing V, and the hold notice effect at the time of passing V can be executed substantially at the same time as the occurrence of the V pass (V pass notification). (See FIG. 55 (c)). The execution time when executing the V-pass hold notice effect is not limited to the embodiment. For example, if it is a predetermined time until the big hit game ends after the V pass occurs, the time Does not matter. Also, instead of fixing the execution time when the V-pass hold notice effect is executed, for example, the number of consecutive chunks, the type of jackpot symbol, the time required from the start of the V round to the V pass, until the occurrence of the jackpot The execution time may be determined and set based on predetermined determination conditions such as the number of fluctuations required (the number of fluctuations between jackpots) and the execution time lottery. By doing so, the execution time when the V-passing hold notice effect is executed can be varied without being fixed, so that the execution time of the V pass hold notice effect can be varied. Thereby, it becomes easier to attract the player's interest to the hold notice effect during the big hit game.

  Further, in the above-described second embodiment, the special notice 2 reservation notice effect that can be executed in the high base state by the special notice 2 reservation notice type E (patterns E1 to E4) (see FIG. 53 (b)). However, in addition to this, the reservation notice effect (see FIGS. 49 (a) to (d)) by the special figure 2 reservation notice types A to D illustrated in the first embodiment can also be executed in the high base state. FIG. 2 It is possible to make a hold notice effect. In this case, when executing the special figure 2 hold notice effect, one pattern is selected from the hold notice effect patterns included in the special figure 2 hold notice types A to E.

  In addition, among the different forms finally described in the first embodiment described above, those that can be applied in the second embodiment can be similarly applied to the second embodiment. For example, also in Example 2, using a predetermined notice effect image different from the effect hold, a notice effect related to the special figure 2 hold in the high base state (hold pre-reading notice) or a hold at the time of passing V during the big hit game It is possible to perform a notice effect. In addition, the display mode (notice display mode) of the second effect hold 9b in the special figure 2 hold notice effect is not limited to that shown in the second embodiment, and various display modes can be adopted. .

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment (embodiment 3), a configuration in which the display mode of the right-handed instruction image 71 can be changed during the high base state is added to the above-described embodiments 1 and 2. Below, it demonstrates centering on a different point (a structure, an effect, etc.) from Example 1 and 2, and description about the point (a structure, an effect, etc.) common to Example 1 and 2 is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 executes the right-handed instruction image change process (S4700) shown in FIG. This right-handed instruction image change process (S4700) is performed when it is determined in S4401 of the received command analysis process (S4302) shown in FIG. 43 that a change start command has been received (YES in S4401). This process is executed in addition to (S4402).

  As shown in FIG. 56, in the right-handed instruction image change process (S4700) of this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the right-handed display flag is ON (S4701), and it is not ON (is OFF). (NO in S4701), the process ends without performing the processes after S4702. This is because when the right-handed display flag is OFF, the right-handed instruction image 71 is not displayed, which is a low base state (a low probability low base state). On the other hand, if the right-handed display flag is ON (YES in S4701), it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation counter (count value) is a predetermined value (M) (S4702).

  Here, the fluctuation counter is a counter (fluctuation number counting means) that counts the number of times of fluctuation display (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol executed in the high base state after the big hit game on the sub-control side. Then, every time a variation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (YES in S4406 in FIG. 43), the variation counter is incremented by one. The count value obtained by the variation counter is reset (initialized) when the next big hit occurs or when the high base state ends (shifts to the low base state) without a big hit. The variation counter is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM of the sub control board 90.

  In addition, the predetermined value (M) that is the determination value of the variation counter is a value corresponding to the number of variations less than the number of variations of the special symbol that is the end condition of the high base state. It is possible to set the value of the number of times less than 100 as the end condition as the predetermined value (M). In this embodiment, the predetermined value (M) is “50” (M = 50). Note that the predetermined value (M) can be arbitrarily set, and may be a fixed value determined in advance or, for example, a fluctuation value that is set randomly every time a big hit occurs.

  If it is determined in S4702 that the value of the variation counter is not a predetermined value (“50” in this example) (NO in S4702), this process ends without performing the processes after S4703. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter is a predetermined value (“50” in this example) (YES in S4702), a right-handed character image deletion command is set in the sub output buffer (S4703), and the right-handed display is changed. The flag is turned ON (S4704), and this process is finished.

  The right-handed character image deletion command set in S4703 is a command transmission together with the variable effect start command set in the sub output buffer in S4507 (see FIG. 46) of the variable effect start process (S4402) based on reception of the change start command. It is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the process (S4006). As a result, the right-handed character image 71a is deleted from the right-handed instruction image 71 (see FIG. 52B) displayed in the right-handed display area 71c of the image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and the right arrow image is displayed. Only 71b is displayed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game state is in the high base state and the special symbol variation display is performed 50 times, the right-handed character image 71a is erased with the start of the next (51st) variation display. Thereafter, only the right arrow image 71b is displayed as the right-handed instruction image 71 in the right-handed display area 71c. That is, when the special symbol variation display is performed 50 times without generating a big hit (continuous change) in the high base state, the right-handed instruction notification mode is “right-handed character image and right-arrow image”. Change from “combination of” to “right arrow image only”.

  The right-handed display change flag that is turned ON in S4704 is a flag that indicates that the right-handed character image 71a has been deleted in the high base state (the right-handed instruction notification mode has changed). By referring to the right-handed display change flag when performing various effects, the reference result (whether or not the right-handed character image 71a is displayed) can be reflected in the effects. For example, after erasing the right-handed character image 71a, a notice effect image related to the change notice or the pre-reading notice is displayed in the area where the right-handed character image 71a is displayed, or a special design (effect design 8 ), The number of variations of the effect display can be increased. It should be noted that the right-handed display change flag turned ON in S4704 is turned OFF when the high base state ends without generating a big hit (continuous change) thereafter.

[Effects of Example 3]
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is displayed in the right-handed display area 71c of the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) from the start of the first round of the big hit game related to the first hit, and thereafter The display mode of the right-handed instruction image 71 that is continuously displayed even in the high base state (right-handed instruction notification mode) can be changed at a predetermined time during the high base state. Specifically, the right-handed character image 71a constituting the right-handed instruction image 71 is erased and only the right-arrow image 71b is right-handed based on the fact that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the high base state becomes a predetermined number. It is displayed in the display area 71c. As a result, the right-handed instruction notification mode can be changed according to the number of changes in the special symbol (effect symbol) in the high base state after the transition from the special gaming state to the high base state. It is possible to make the person pay attention to the right-handed instruction notification.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the right-handed instruction notification during the high base state displays a right-handed instruction image 71 smaller than the screen size at the corner of the display screen 7a (upper right of the screen in this example). It has become. By configuring such a display mode of the right-handed instruction image 71 (right-handed instruction notification mode) so as to be changeable, it is possible to add an interest such as recognizing a slight change on the display screen during the high base state. It becomes possible.

  It should be noted that the change (change) of the right-handed instruction notification mode is not limited to the erasing of the right-handed character image 71a shown in the present embodiment. For example, erasure of the right arrow image 71b, change in display size (enlargement or reduction) of one or both of the right-handed character image 71a and the right arrow image 71b, change in color, change in pattern, change in display position (display location) As long as it causes a visual change in the display mode of the right-handed instruction image 71 (that is, the right-handed instruction notification mode), such as a change in the typeface of the right-handed character image 71a and a change in the shape of the right arrow image 71b Good. In this case, for example, image data of a plurality of types of right-handed instruction images (right-handed character image, right-handed arrow image) having different sizes, colors, shapes, and the like are stored in advance in the ROM of the image control board 100, from among them. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which image data to be displayed is read out and right-handed instruction notification based on the read-out image data is executed in the right-handed display area 71c.

  In addition, regarding the timing for changing the display mode (right-handed command notification mode) of the right-handed instruction image 71 in the high base state (time to be changed), it is limited to the configuration determined by the number of changes in the special symbol shown in the present embodiment. Is not to be done. For example, the change time may be determined based on various conditions, such as determining the change time based on the elapsed time since the transition to the high base state, or determining the change time based on the number of performance executions such as a specific reach effect or a notice effect. It is possible to determine.

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this embodiment (embodiment 4), a configuration in which the display mode of the right-handed instruction image 71 can be changed during the big hit game is added to the embodiment 3 described above. Below, it demonstrates centering on a different point (a structure, an effect, etc.) from Examples 1-3, and description about the point (A structure, an effect, etc.) which is common in Examples 1-3 is abbreviate | omitted.

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 executes the right-handed instruction image change process (S4800) shown in FIG. This right-handed instruction image change process (S4800) is a process executed as a subroutine of the big hit game-related effect process (S4409) in the received command analysis process (S4302) shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 57, in the right-handed instruction image change process (S4800) of this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the right-handed display change flag is ON (S4801), and is not ON (is OFF). In this case (NO in S4801), this process ends without performing the processes after S4802. In the present embodiment, as described in the second embodiment, when the right-handed instruction notification mode (display mode of the right-handed instruction image 71) is changed during the high base state, the right-handed instruction after the change is changed. The notification mode can be changed again at a predetermined time during the big hit game related to the big hit (continuous change) in the same high base state. Therefore, in S4801, the right-handed display change flag that can be turned on in S4704 is referred to. If the right-handed display change flag is not ON (OFF), a right-handed instruction notification mode (right-handed instruction) Since the display mode of the image 71 is not changed during the high base state, the present process is terminated without performing the processes after S4802.

  On the other hand, when the right-handed display change flag is ON (YES in S4801), it is determined whether or not the big hit game-related command received in S4405 is a 2R start command (S4802). (NO in S4802), this processing is finished without performing the processing after S4803. On the other hand, if it is a 2R start command (YES in S4802), the right-handed character image display command is set in the sub output buffer (S4803), the right-handed display change flag is turned OFF (S4804), and this processing is performed. Finish.

  The right-handed character image display command set in S4803 is displayed by the command transmission process (S4006) together with the 2R start effect command set in the sub output buffer in the process of S4409 (see FIG. 43) based on the reception of the 2R start command. It is transmitted to the control board 100. Thereby, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a round effect display of the second round is performed, and a right-handed character image 71a is added above the right-arrow image 71b being displayed in the right-handed display area 71c. Is displayed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the special symbol is displayed in a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in the high base state, and after this, the right-handed character image 71a is erased, and then the big hit in the high base state. In the case of (continuous), the right-handed character image 71a is displayed again in the right-handed display area 71c with the start of the second round of the big hit game. That is, the right-handed instruction notification mode of “only right arrow image” changes (returns) to the original “combination of right-handed character image and right arrow image”.

[Effects of Example 4]
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the right-handed instruction notification mode in which only the right arrow image 71a is obtained by erasing the right-handed character image 71a in the high base state is in the high base state. It can change at a predetermined time during the following special game state. Specifically, in the high base state, after the right-handed character image 71a is deleted, only the right arrow image 71b is displayed in the right-handed display area 71c, and then the big hit (continuous change) in the high base state. In this case, with the start of the second round of the jackpot game related to this, the right-handed character image 71a previously erased is the original of the right-handed display area 71c displaying only the right arrow image 71b. It is displayed at the position. As a result, the right-handed instruction notification mode can change (can be returned) in accordance with the progress of the round game in the special game state after the transition from the high base state to the special game state. It is possible to make the person pay attention to the right-handed instruction notification.

  In particular, in this embodiment, after erasing the right-handed character image 71a included in the right-handed instruction image 71 displayed smaller in the corner of the display screen 7a (upper right in the present example) during the high base state, The right-handed character image 71a can be displayed at the original position during the special game state. This makes it possible to add an interest such as recognizing a further change (return in this example) of the right-handed instruction notification mode once changed during the high base state.

  Note that the change (change) of the right-handed instruction notification mode in the special gaming state following the high base state is not limited to the display of the right-handed character image 71a again shown in the present embodiment. For example, the display size change (enlargement or reduction), the color change, the display position (display location) change, the design change, etc. of the right arrow image 71b continuously displayed after erasing the right-handed character image 71a. It may be. In addition, regardless of the change in the right-handed instruction notification mode in the previous high base state, the right-handed instruction notification mode continuously executed from the high base state is changed to a predetermined time in the special gaming state. It may be configured to (change).

  Furthermore, the timing for changing the mode of the right-handed instruction notification in the special game state (time to change) is limited to the start timing (2R start command reception opportunity) of the second round of the jackpot game shown in this embodiment. It is not a thing. For example, the start timing of a predetermined round after the first round or the third round, the execution timing of a round game, the end timing of a predetermined round (round reception command reception timing), the start timing of an opening performance (opening command reception timing), an opening performance From the start to the end of the special gaming state, such as the opening timing of the opening effect (when the 1R start command is received), the start timing of the ending effect (when the ending command is received), the end timing of the ending effect, It is possible to set any time as a change time. It is also possible to determine the change time based on the elapsed time since the transition to the special game state.

  As described above, Examples 1 to 4 have been described as embodiments of the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to these, and the wording of each claim is not departed from the scope described in each claim. However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and it is possible to appropriately add an improvement based on the knowledge that a person skilled in the art normally has, as long as the person skilled in the art can easily replace it.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the right-handed instruction image 71 is composed of the right-handed character image 71a representing the “right-handed” character and the one right arrow image 71b positioned above it. The mode of the hit instruction image 71 is not limited to this, and can be configured only with a right-handed character image or only with a right arrow image. In this case, the display mode change (change) in the above-described third and fourth embodiments is not the deletion of the partial image constituting the right-handed instruction notification, but the mode (size, color, shape, display) of the displayed image itself. (Position etc.) may be changed (changed). In the above-described embodiment, the display position of the right-handed instruction image 71 is the upper right (right-handed display area 71c) of the display screen 7a. However, the display position of the right-handed instruction image 71 is not limited to this. The predetermined position on the display screen 7a can be set. However, in order to avoid hindering the effect symbol game effect and the big hit game effect (round effect or the like), it is desirable to display on the display screen 7a near the outer periphery (screen peripheral side). Further, when a plurality of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device are provided, the right-handed instruction image may be displayed on a display device different from the display device on which the effect symbol game effect or the jackpot game effect is performed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the left-handed instruction image 70 is composed of a left-handed character image 70a representing the characters “please return to left-handed” and three left arrow images 70b positioned above the left-handed character image 70a. However, the aspect of the left-handed instruction image 70 is not limited to this, and various forms can be adopted in the same manner as the right-handed instruction image 71 described above. Note that the left-handed instruction image 70 is displayed (left-handed instruction notification) when the high base state (right-handed gaming state) ends and the state shifts to the low base state (left-handed gaming state). Changing (returning) from “right-handed” to “left-handed” needs to be positively shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. It is desirable that the display size is increased or the display position is closer to the center of the screen, for example, in such a manner that the player can easily recognize (a conspicuous mode).

  In the above-described embodiment, the right-handed instruction image 71 is displayed in the right-handed display area 71c from the start of the first round of the big hit game related to the first hit to the end of the high base state thereafter (for the execution of the big hit game). (Excluding the end of the event), and even when a jackpot game related to the continuous change is performed during that period, including during the execution of the fanfare, round, and ending effects It was supposed to be executed. On the other hand, the display of the right-handed instruction image 71 that continues from the first round of the big hit game related to the first win, the time when the fanfare effect and the ending effect in the big hit game related to the consecutive games are performed, that is, the game state Is interrupted (temporarily erased) at the time of transition to the special game state or the time of transition to the high base state after the special game, and when the fanfare effect and the ending effect are completed, the right-handed instruction image 71 is displayed at the same display position. It may be resumed at. Even if the display of the right-handed instruction image 71 is temporarily interrupted in this way, the possibility that the right-handed instruction notification during the continuous Chang period will be difficult for the player to recognize is extremely low (no possibility). It is possible to achieve the same effect as the above-described embodiment.

  In the above-described embodiment, the number of rounds of the big hit game is assumed to have two types, “2R” and “15R”. However, the number of rounds is not limited to this, and there are three types of round numbers. The above may be used, or only one type may be used. Furthermore, the opening pattern of the first grand prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 (V attacker) is not limited to the above-described embodiment. For example, the opening time and the number of times of opening per round are various. It is possible to adopt the embodiment.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the possibility of passing V becomes higher (easier) and lower (substantially inconspicuous) depending on the opening / closing time of the second big prize opening 35 (V attacker) in the V round. If possible) was set. That is, when the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 in the V round is relatively long, it becomes easy to enter the game ball into the second big prize opening 35, and the second big prize opening 35 It is assumed that at least one of the game balls that have entered the ball passes through the specific area 39 almost certainly, and when the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 in the V round is relatively short, the second big prize It is difficult (substantially impossible) to enter the game ball into the mouth 35, so that the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39. Instead, a movable piece that opens and closes a specific area is provided, and the movable piece is operated based on the number of balls entered into the second big prize opening 35 in the V round (count value by the number of entered balls counting means). Depending on the operation mode, the possibility of passing V may be different.

  For example, in the case where the movable piece is operated based on a first predetermined number (for example, first) of balls in the second grand prize winning opening 35 in the V round, the operation mode of the movable piece may be V-passable. When the movable piece is operated based on the second predetermined number (for example, any one of the second to the prescribed number) of balls, the movement piece is moved to a lower (substantially impossible) mode. The operation mode is a mode in which the possibility of passing V is high. Then, the big hit where the movable piece operates only in a mode with a low possibility of passing V in the V round, that is, the big hit where the movable piece operates only based on the first predetermined number of balls entering the second big prize opening 35. “V non-passing expected big hit”, which is a big hit that may be operated in a mode with a low possibility of passing V or a mode with a high possibility of passing V, that is, a first predetermined to the second big winning opening 35 The big hit on which the movable piece operates based on the number of incoming balls and the second predetermined number of incoming balls may be referred to as “V passing expected big hit”. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the probability variation function is activated (whether or not a high probability state is generated) based on whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area, as in the above-described embodiment.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the player is given a gaming privilege of generating a high probability state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific area 39 in the V round during the big hit game (special game). Although the thing was illustrated, the privilege said by this invention is not restricted to generation | occurrence | production of a high probability state. For example, it gives a player some kind of benefit, such as a high base state that increases the frequency of game balls entering the start opening, or a variation time shortened state that shortens the variation time of identification information (normal state). There is no limitation on the content (type) of the privilege. Moreover, based on having passed the specific area | region for the game ball | bowl, you may provide one privilege, or you may provide a some privilege. Further, the privilege referred to in the present invention may be, for example, payout of a prize ball (game ball) based on detection of a game ball in addition to those related to a game state such as a high probability state, a high base state, or a short time state. In addition, it may be a special privilege such that a special effect with a low appearance frequency such as a premier effect is generated based on the detection of the game ball so that the player can experience that kind of effect.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko (so-called “V-certain machine”) having the specific region 39 as the probability changing operation port is illustrated. In a game machine of a type that determines whether or not to give a high probability state based on the result of the special symbol success / failure determination result (the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed) (so-called “symbol change machine”) However, the present invention is applicable. Alternatively, the present invention can also be applied to a type of gaming machine that does not have a probability variation function. In addition, a special area (V area) is provided in the big winning opening that can be entered when the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a small hit, and a game ball that has entered the big winning opening at the time of a small hit game is The present invention can also be applied to one type and two types of pachinko gaming machines in which a big hit game is executed based on the V pass when passing through a specific area (V pass).

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned Example, the control process (what is called special figure 2) which digests the 2nd special figure reservation (fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol) prior to the 1st special figure reservation (fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and control processing (so-called special figure 1 priority fluctuation) in which the first special figure reservation is prioritized over the second special figure reservation may be used. Alternatively, priority is not set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are digested in order from the oldest stored one. It is good also as a control process (a so-called entering order (memory order) fluctuation) control process. Also, instead of the special figure 2 priority fluctuation in the above-described embodiment, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (digestion of the first special figure hold and digestion of the second special figure hold). You may employ | adopt the control processing (so-called special figure 1, 2 simultaneous fluctuation | variation) performed in parallel.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special figure holding storage unit is read and the read acquired random number value (acquired information) is determined for the prior determination based on the starting entrance. Although (pre-determination) is performed ("starting ball entry process (S205)", see FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), the pre-determination method is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure holding storage unit, an area (acquisition information storage means) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired based on starting entry) to be subjected to prior determination is stored in the main control unit and sub-control. The acquired information stored in the storage area (preliminary determination storage unit) may be determined (preliminary determination). In this case, it is possible to erase the acquisition information (acquisition information stored in another storage area) used for the preliminary determination by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit. Or it is good also as what pre-determines about the acquisition information acquired based on starting entrance instead of pre-determining about the acquisition information memorize | stored in the special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part. That is, it may be determined in advance before the acquired information is stored in the special figure storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquisition information to be subject to prior determination separately from the special figure storage unit, and it is also necessary to read out the acquisition information stored in the special figure storage unit for the preliminary determination. Absent.

  In the above-described embodiment, the probability of jackpot can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by non-operation / operation of the probability variation function. Is not limited to this. For example, three or more types of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). Also good. Furthermore, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. A plurality of types of probability conditions that define the relationship between a low probability and a high probability are provided, and any one of the plurality of types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable), for example, when the gaming machine is turned on. Also good.

[Others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification are disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference invention 1)
Conventionally, it is possible to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the identification information (for example, special symbol or effect symbol) is variably displayed and the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific display result. Amusement machines are widely known. In this type of gaming machine, the game entertainment is improved by performing various effects to increase the player's expectation during the variation display of the identification information. As such an effect, information regarding the fluctuation display of the identification information currently being executed or the fluctuation display of the identification information that is decided to be executed later (for example, the possibility that the display result will be a specific display result (reliability)) There is known a notice effect that gives a notice of the effect until the display result is derived (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2003-164617 and 2009-95470).

  However, the notice effect described above has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the aspect of the notice effect is uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to enhance the gaming interest. The present reference invention 1 has been made in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to realize a notice effect capable of attracting the player's interest and to improve the gaming interest. It is in.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 for solving the above-described problems is
A game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous for a player based on a variation display of identification information and a display result of the variation display being a specific display result,
A notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect related to the change display of the identification information;
A gaming state control means capable of controlling a gaming state capable of executing a variable display of identification information, and
The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
The aspect of the notice effect may be different when the gaming state is controlled to the first gaming state and when the gaming state is controlled to the second gaming state.

  In such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a notice effect relating to the variation display of the identification information, and at least the first game state and the second game as game states in which the variation display of the identification information can be performed. It is possible to control the state. And when the gaming state is controlled to the first gaming state and when the gaming state is controlled to the second gaming state, the aspect of the notice effect may be different. For this reason, it is possible to differentiate the notice effect between the first gaming state and the second gaming state. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the notice effect in each gaming state.

The gaming machine of reference invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 1-1 described above,
The variation display of the identification information is executed based on the acquired information acquired when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
Comprising acquisition information storage means capable of storing acquisition information acquired by establishment of a predetermined condition;
The notice effect includes at least a first notice effect that makes suggestions regarding the change display before executing the change display of the identification information based on the acquisition information stored in the acquisition information storage means.
The aspect of the notice effect is at least an aspect related to the first notice effect.

  In such a gaming machine, the variation display of the identification information is executed based on the acquired information acquired when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the acquired information that can store the acquired acquired information The storage means is provided. In addition, as the advance notice effect, at least a first advance notice effect that makes an indication regarding the change display before executing the change display of the identification information based on the acquisition information stored in the acquisition information storage means is provided. This aspect when the aspect of the notice effect differs between the second gaming state and the second gaming state is an aspect related to at least the first notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the first notice effect between the first gaming state and the second gaming state. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the first notice effect in each gaming state.

The gaming machine of reference invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 1-2 described above,
A storage display means capable of displaying a storage display indicating that the acquisition information is stored in the acquisition information storage means;
The first notice effect is to change the memory display to a specific memory display different from normal,
The aspect relating to the first notice effect includes at least a display aspect of the specific memory display when the memory display is changed to the specific memory display.
The display mode is different when the gaming state is controlled to the first gaming state and when the gaming state is controlled to the second gaming state.

  Such a gaming machine includes storage display means capable of displaying a storage display indicating that the acquisition information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, and the first notice effect produces a storage display that is different from the normal display. It is something to change. The aspect related to the first notice effect includes at least the display form of the specific memory display when the memory display is changed to the specific memory display, and when the gaming state is controlled to the first gaming state and the second The display mode of the specific memory display differs depending on when the game state is controlled. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the display mode of the memory display (specific memory display) related to the first notice effect in the first game state and the second game state. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the first notice effect in each gaming state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3 described above,
Corresponding display means capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display during the variation display of the identification information,
The notice effect includes a second notice effect using at least the correspondence display,
The aspect of the notice effect is at least an aspect related to the second notice effect.

  Such a gaming machine is provided with a corresponding display means capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display during the variable information identification display, and has at least a second notice effect using the corresponding display as the notice effect. In this case, when the aspect of the notice effect is different between the first game state and the second game state, this aspect is at least an aspect related to the second notice effect. For this reason, it is possible to differentiate the second notice effect between the first gaming state and the second gaming state. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the second notice effect in each gaming state.

The gaming machine of reference invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of reference invention 1-4 described above,
The aspect related to the second notice effect includes at least a first form that does not execute the second notice effect and a second form that executes the second notice effect,
Either the notice effect mode when the gaming state is controlled to the first gaming state or the notice effect mode when the gaming state is controlled to the second gaming state. One aspect is included, and the second aspect is included in the other.

  Such a gaming machine has at least a first mode in which the second notice effect is not executed and a second mode in which the second notice effect is executed as the mode related to the second notice effect, and the gaming state is The first aspect is included in one of the aspect of the notice effect when being controlled to the first game state and the aspect of the notice effect when the game state is being controlled to the second game state, and the other is The second mode is included. For this reason, it is possible to set one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state as a gaming state in which the second notice effect can be executed and the other as a gaming state in which the second notice effect is not executed. This makes it possible to differentiate the notice effect based on the presence or absence of the second notice effect in each gaming state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-5 described above,
The second gaming state is a high-frequency state in which the execution frequency of the variation display of the identification information is higher than the first gaming state.

  In such a gaming machine, the second gaming state is a high-frequency state in which the execution frequency of the identification information variation display is higher than that of the first gaming state. For this reason, in the second game state (high frequency state), the execution frequency of the notice effect is increased as the execution frequency of the variation display of the identification information is higher than that in the first game state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest of the second gaming state (high frequency state).

  According to the reference invention 1 described above, it is possible to realize a notice effect that can attract the player's interest, and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference invention 2)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 for solving the same problem as that of Reference Invention 1 described above is
Acquisition information storage means capable of storing acquisition information acquired based on game ball detection;
An identification information display means capable of executing a variable display of the identification information based on the acquired information;
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information being the specific display result;
A notice effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined notice effect,
In the notice effect, there is at least a notice effect on hold that makes an indication regarding the change display before executing the change display of the identification information based on the acquisition information stored in the acquisition information storage means,
The hold notice effect includes at least a first hold notice effect that can be started during a game other than the special game and a second hold notice effect that can be started during the special game. is there.

  In such a gaming machine, the acquisition information storage means capable of storing the acquisition information acquired based on the game ball detection, the identification information display means capable of executing the variable display of the identification information based on the acquisition information, and the identification information A special game execution means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display of which is a specific display result, and a notice effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined notice effect. Yes. And, as a notice effect, at least, it has a hold notice effect that makes suggestions regarding the change display before execution of the change display of the identification information based on the acquisition information stored in the acquisition information storage means, At least a first hold notice effect that can be started during a game other than a special game and a second hold notice effect that can be started during a special game are provided. For this reason, the hold notice effect can be started in each of the game other than the special game and the special game. Thereby, it is possible to increase the execution (start) opportunity of the hold notice effect and attract the player's interest in the hold notice effect.

The gaming machine of reference invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 2-1 described above.
The notice effect execution means is a case where the first hold notice effect is started during a game other than the special game, and before execution of the variable display of the identification information based on the acquired information corresponding to the first hold notice effect. When the special game is executed, the second hold notice effect can be started for the variable display of the identification information based on the acquired information corresponding to the first hold notice effect during the special game. Is.

  In such a gaming machine, when the first hold notice effect is started during a game other than the special game, the special information is displayed before executing the variable display of the identification information based on the acquired information corresponding to the first hold notice effect. When the game is executed, the second hold notice effect is displayed during the special game for the variable display of the identification information based on the acquired information corresponding to the first hold notice effect that is started (that is, the first hold notice effect being executed). It is possible to start with. For this reason, the acquired information that is subject to the execution (start) of the first hold notice effect during a game other than the special game may be the target of the execution (start) of the second hold notice effect during the special game. It becomes. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest during the special game with respect to the hold notice effect (first hold notice effect) started during the game before the special game (in the game other than the special game). .

The gaming machine of reference invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 2-1 or reference invention 2-2 described above.
A variable entrance that allows game balls to enter during the special game;
Detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the variable entrance,
A privilege granting means capable of granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the detection means detects a game ball,
The notice effect executing means can start the second hold notice effect based on the fact that the detecting means has detected a game ball.

  In such a gaming machine, a variable entrance that allows a game ball to enter during a special game, a detection means that can detect a game ball that has entered the variable entrance, and a detection means that detects the game ball And a bonus granting means that can grant a predetermined bonus based on the fact that the detection means has detected a game ball, and the second hold notice effect can be started. . For this reason, the variable entrance and the detection means that trigger the provision of the privilege can also trigger the start (occurrence) of the second hold notice effect. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in entering a game ball into the variable entrance during a special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-3 described above,
The acquisition information includes at least non-specific acquisition information in which the display result of the variation display of the identification information is not a specific display result, and specific acquisition information in which the display result of the variation display of the identification information is a specific display result,
The notice effect execution means includes:
The first hold notice effect can be executed as a hold notice effect for making a suggestion regarding the variation display of the identification information based on the non-specific acquisition information, and the hold for making the suggestion regarding the change display of the identification information based on the specific acquisition information It can also be executed as a notice effect,
The second hold notice effect can be executed as a hold notice effect that suggests a change display of identification information based on the specific acquisition information.

  In such a gaming machine, as acquisition information, at least non-specific acquisition information in which the display result of the variation display of the identification information is not the specific display result, and specific acquisition information in which the display result of the variation display of the identification information is the specific display result And have. The first hold notice effect may be executed as a hold notice effect that suggests a variation display of identification information based on non-specific acquisition information, and a hold notice effect that suggests a change display of identification information based on specific acquisition information Can be executed as well. On the other hand, the second hold notice effect can be executed as a hold notice effect that makes suggestions regarding the variable display of the identification information based on the specific acquisition information. For this reason, the first hold notice effect can be executed both when the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific display result and when it becomes the non-specific display result. It can be executed only when the display result of the variation display of the identification information is the specific display result. In other words, the first hold notice effect is a notice effect that indefinitely suggests whether or not the display result of the variation display of the identification information is the specific display result, and the second hold notice effect is a variation display of the identification information. This is a notice effect that definitely suggests that the display result is the specific display result. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the hold notice effect.

The gaming machine of reference invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of reference invention 2-4 described above.
The special game includes at least a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The specific acquisition information includes at least a first specific acquisition information in which the display result of the variation display of the identification information is the first specific display result, and a second specific display result in which the display result of the variation display of the identification information is the second specific display result. Specific acquisition information,
The special game execution means includes
The first special game can be executed based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information being the first specific display result,
The second special game can be executed based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information being the second specific display result,
The advance notice execution means can execute the second hold advance notice effect as a hold advance notice effect that suggests a change display of identification information based on the second specific acquisition information.

  Such a gaming machine has at least a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game as a special game, and the specific acquisition information includes at least The first specific acquisition information having the display result of the variation display of the identification information as the first specific display result, and the second specific acquisition information having the display result of the variation display of the identification information as the second specific display result. ing. The first special game can be executed based on the fact that the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, and the display result of the variation display of the identification information is the second special game. It can be executed based on the specific display result. And the 2nd reservation notice effect can be performed as a reservation notice effect which suggests about the change display of the discernment information based on the 2nd specific acquisition information. For this reason, when the display result of the variation display of the identification information is the second specific display result, that is, when the second special game that is more advantageous to the player can be executed, It will be a hold notice effect that definitely suggests. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the superiority of the second hold notice effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-5 described above.
A storage display means capable of displaying a storage display indicating that the acquisition information is stored in the acquisition information storage means;
The notice effect executing means is capable of executing the first reserved notice effect and the second reserved notice effect by the storage display.

  Such a gaming machine includes a storage display unit capable of displaying a storage display indicating that the acquisition information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and the storage display displays the first hold notice effect and the second hold. It is possible to execute a notice effect. For this reason, it is possible for the player to enjoy the first hold notice effect and the second hold notice effect through the memory display displayed on the memory display means during the game other than the special game and during the special game. It becomes. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the display mode of the memory display (holding notice effect).

  According to the above reference invention 2, it is possible to realize a notice effect capable of attracting the player's interest and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference invention 3)
Conventionally, a center role (a central role) including a liquid crystal display device or the like is provided in the approximate center of the game area. In a normal game state, a game ball is launched toward the game area on the left side of the center role (so-called “left” In a game state where a game advantageous to the player such as a big hit game or a probability change game is performed, a game ball is launched (so-called “right-hand”) to the game area on the right side from the center role. A gaming machine is known. In this type of gaming machine, it is common to issue an instruction notification that prompts the player to make a right turn when executing a big hit game or a probability variation game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-12185).

  In recent game machines, there is a tendency to increase the amount of production performed during the game in order to improve the gaming interest. For this reason, there is a possibility that the right-handed instruction notification performed during the game will be mixed with the effect, making it difficult for the player to recognize. The present invention 3 is made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a firing instruction notification that is easy for a player to recognize.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A gaming machine that plays a game by launching a game ball toward a game area,
Gaming state control means capable of controlling the gaming state;
Instruction notification executing means capable of executing an instruction notification for instructing which region of the game area to fire the game ball;
The gaming state includes at least a predetermined gaming state in which a game ball is emitted by launching a game ball toward a predetermined region of the gaming region,
The predetermined gaming state includes at least a first predetermined gaming state and a second predetermined gaming state,
In the instruction notification, there is a predetermined instruction notification instructing to fire a game ball toward the predetermined area,
The instruction notification execution means is capable of executing the predetermined instruction notification in the same manner in the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state.

  In such a gaming machine, at least a first predetermined game state and a second predetermined game state are provided as predetermined game states in which a game ball is emitted toward a predetermined region of the game region to play a game. ing. In addition, it is possible to execute a predetermined instruction notification instructing to fire a game ball toward a predetermined area in the game area in the same manner in the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state. It has become. As a result, for the player, although the game state is different between the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state, the predetermined instruction notification is executed in the same manner. 2 In any gaming state of the predetermined gaming state, it is easy to recognize the predetermined instruction notification.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-1 described above.
The gaming state control means can control the gaming state from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state,
The instruction notification execution means executes the predetermined instruction notification in a predetermined manner in the first predetermined gaming state, and also after the gaming state shifts from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state. The predetermined instruction notification in the first predetermined gaming state is executed.

  In such a gaming machine, the predetermined instruction notification is executed in a predetermined manner in the first predetermined gaming state, and when the gaming state shifts from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state, Even in the second predetermined gaming state, the predetermined instruction notification in the first predetermined gaming state before the transition is executed. As a result, for the player, even if the gaming state shifts from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state, the predetermined instruction notification is executed in the same manner before and after the transition. It becomes easy to recognize the notification.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-2 described above.
The instruction notification executing means can change the mode of the predetermined instruction notification after the gaming state has shifted from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state to a predetermined time in the second predetermined gaming state. It is characterized by being.

  In such a gaming machine, the predetermined instruction notification mode in the case where the predetermined instruction notification in the first predetermined gaming state is executed even after the gaming state has shifted from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state, 2. It is possible to change to a predetermined time in a predetermined gaming state. Thereby, the mode of the predetermined instruction notification can be changed after the transition from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state, so that the player can be focused on the predetermined instruction notification.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-3 described above.
The gaming state control means can control the gaming state from the second predetermined gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state,
The instruction notification executing means executes the predetermined instruction notification in a predetermined manner in the second predetermined gaming state, and also after the gaming state shifts from the second predetermined gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state. The predetermined instruction notification in the second predetermined gaming state is executed.

  In such a gaming machine, the predetermined instruction notification is executed in a predetermined manner in the second predetermined gaming state, and when the gaming state shifts from the second predetermined gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state, Even in the first predetermined gaming state, the predetermined instruction notification in the first predetermined gaming state before the transition is executed. As a result, for the player, even if the gaming state shifts from the second predetermined gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state, the predetermined instruction notification is executed in the same manner before and after the transition. It becomes easy to recognize the notification.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-4 described above.
The instruction notification executing means can change the mode of the predetermined instruction notification after the gaming state has shifted from the second predetermined gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state to a predetermined time in the first predetermined gaming state. It is characterized by being.

  In such a gaming machine, the predetermined instruction notification mode in the case where the predetermined instruction notification in the second predetermined gaming state is executed even after the gaming state has shifted from the second predetermined gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state, It is possible to change to a predetermined time during one predetermined gaming state. As a result, the mode of the predetermined instruction notification can be changed after the transition from the second predetermined gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state, so that the player can be focused on the predetermined instruction notification.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-5 described above.
The instruction notification execution means can execute the predetermined instruction notification by displaying on the predetermined display means a predetermined instruction image instructing to launch a game ball toward the predetermined area,
The same predetermined instruction image can be displayed on the display means in the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state.

  In such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a predetermined instruction notification by displaying a predetermined instruction image on a predetermined display means. The same predetermined instruction image can be displayed in the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state. Accordingly, although the game state is different between the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state, the predetermined instruction image is the same for the player, and therefore it is easy to recognize the display of the predetermined instruction image (predetermined instruction notification). It will be a thing.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-7 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-6 described above.
The instruction notification execution means can display the same predetermined instruction image on the same display unit of the display means in the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state. is there.

  In such a gaming machine, it is possible to display the same predetermined instruction image on the same display unit of the display means in the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state. As a result, for the player, although the game state is different between the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state, the predetermined instruction image and its display position are both the same. ) Is easy to recognize.

  According to the above reference invention 3, it is possible to execute a firing instruction notification that is easy for a player to recognize.

  1 pachinko machine, 2 game board, 3 game area, 7 image display device, 7a display screen, 7b, effect design display area, 7c background display area, 8 effect design, 9a first effect hold, 9b second effect hold, 9c 1st effect hold display area (1st effect hold display part), 9d 2nd effect hold display area (2nd effect hold display part), 9e Fluctuation hold display area, 20 1st start opening, 21 2nd start opening, 30 1st grand prize opening, 35 2nd big prize opening, 41a First special symbol display (first special symbol display unit), 41b Second special symbol display (second special symbol display unit), 80 Main control board (Main control unit, game control means), 81 game control microcomputer (main control unit), 90 sub control board (sub control part), 91 effect control microcomputer (sub control part), 100 image control board (image control part) ), 101 images Patronized microcomputer (image control unit).

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs a variable display of identification information and that can execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display being a specific display result,
Provided with a notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect related to the change display of the identification information,
The notice effect includes at least a first notice effect that can be executed when the game state when the variation display of the identification information is performed is the first game state, and when the game state is the second game state. A gaming machine characterized by having a second notice effect that can be executed.

Images